WO2022056707A1 - Network and communication selection method, and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Network and communication selection method, and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022056707A1
WO2022056707A1 PCT/CN2020/115508 CN2020115508W WO2022056707A1 WO 2022056707 A1 WO2022056707 A1 WO 2022056707A1 CN 2020115508 W CN2020115508 W CN 2020115508W WO 2022056707 A1 WO2022056707 A1 WO 2022056707A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
network
terminal device
cell
indication information
ntn
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/115508
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
吴烨丹
耿婷婷
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/115508 priority Critical patent/WO2022056707A1/en
Publication of WO2022056707A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022056707A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more particularly, to a method and communication device for selecting a network and communication.
  • non-terrestrial network (NTN) system can cover various terrestrial access network equipment such as oceans, deserts, deep mountains and polar regions. It is not suitable for deployment. area, has the advantage of wide coverage. However, since the satellite is far from the ground, the time delay in the NTN communication will be relatively large, and at the same time, the deployment cost of the current NTN network is relatively high.
  • NTN non-terrestrial network
  • NTN networks may gradually decline. As the NTN network becomes denser, more and more scenarios overlap with the terrestrial network (TN). Due to the different deployment methods and costs of NTN and TN, the user experience and charges are different between NTN and TN. Currently, whether a terminal selects TN or NTN is limited by network control or protocol, resulting in poor user experience.
  • the present application provides a method and a communication device for selecting a network and communication, which can enable a terminal device to independently choose to access an NTN network or a TN network.
  • a method for selecting a network may include: the terminal device determines that the candidate network types include NTN and/or TN according to a first determination result, wherein the first determination result includes at least one of the following determination results : Whether the terminal device is in the first mode, whether the terminal device has NTN access capability, whether the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN, the candidate network type is used for the terminal device to select a service network, in the first mode
  • the terminal device selects a service network according to a first network type, and the first network type includes at least one of the following: the NTN, the TN; the terminal device selects a service network according to the candidate network type for camping or accessing.
  • the terminal device can determine the candidate network type according to its own capabilities, the mode it is in, and whether it is allowed to access the NTN, so that the way the terminal device determines the candidate network type is no longer limited to network control or protocol limitations.
  • Whether a terminal device is allowed to access NTN can be determined by subscription information of the user identity of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device since the user can order different subscription services according to their own needs, it is equivalent that the terminal device can consider the user's needs when determining the candidate network type, so the user experience can be improved.
  • the method further includes: enabling or disabling the first mode is set by a user.
  • the terminal device in the case that whether the terminal device is in the first mode is set by the user, it is equivalent that the terminal device considers the user's needs when determining the candidate network type, so that the user experience can be improved.
  • the method further includes: displaying, by the terminal device, a control for enabling or disabling the first mode.
  • the on or off of the first mode is instructed by a network device.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device generates second indication information at a non-access statum (NAS), where the second indication information is used for Instruct the access layer (access statum, AS) of the terminal device to obtain a network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type; the terminal device obtains one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information at the AS, the One or more third indication information corresponds to the one or more network identifiers, and the third indication information is used to indicate that the NTN and/or the TN are deployed under the corresponding network identifier; The one or more network identifiers and/or the one or more third indication information determine a service network identifier, where the serving network identifier is any one of the one or more network identifiers.
  • NAS non-access statum
  • the terminal device can flexibly select a network in which NTN/TN is deployed while considering candidate network types.
  • the terminal device determines the service network identifier at the NAS according to the one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information, including: the terminal device The NAS determines the first network identifier as the serving network identifier according to the first instruction, where the first instruction is used to instruct to determine the first network identifier as the serving network identifier.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device acquires one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information in the AS, the one or more The third indication information corresponds to the one or more network identifiers, and the third indication information is used to indicate that the NTN and/or the TN are deployed under the corresponding network identifiers; The identity and/or the one or more third indication information determine a service network identity, where the service network identity is any one of the one or more network identities.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device determines, at the AS, a second network identifier according to the one or more third indication information, where the second network identifier is the one or a network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type among the multiple network identifiers; the terminal device determines the serving network identifier in the NAS according to the second network identifier.
  • the method further includes: determining, by the terminal device, whether the first cell satisfies a first criterion, where the first criterion is at least one network identifier of the first cell and the The candidate network type corresponds; in the case that the first cell satisfies the first criterion, the terminal device camps on the first cell.
  • the terminal device in the process of cell selection/reactivation, can flexibly select the cell where the NTN/TN is deployed while considering the candidate network type.
  • a communication method may include: the terminal device determines that the candidate network type includes NTN and/or TN according to a first determination result, wherein the first determination result includes at least one of the following determination results: Whether the terminal device is in the first mode, whether the terminal device has NTN access capability, whether the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN, the candidate network type is used for the terminal device to select a service network, in the first mode, the The terminal device selects a service network according to a first network type, where the first network type includes at least one of the following: the NTN and the TN; the terminal device sends fourth indication information to the first network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the Candidate network type, the fourth indication information is used by the first network device to select a target cell for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can determine the candidate network type according to its own capabilities, the mode it is in, and whether it is allowed to access the NTN, so that the way the terminal device determines the candidate network type is no longer limited to network control or protocol limitations.
  • Whether a terminal device is allowed to access NTN can be determined by subscription information of the user identity of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device since the user can order different subscription services according to their own needs, it is equivalent that the terminal device can consider the user's needs when determining the candidate network type, so the user experience can be improved.
  • the terminal device sends indication information to the network device to indicate the candidate network type, so that the network device can select a target cell for the terminal device in consideration of the candidate network type of the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receiving configuration information from the first network device, the configuration information including the information of the target cell, the network of the target cell The type corresponds to the candidate network type; the terminal device is handed over to the target cell.
  • the first mode is turned on or off by a user.
  • the terminal device in the case that whether the terminal device is in the first mode is set by the user, it is equivalent that the terminal device considers the user's needs when determining the candidate network type, so that the user experience can be improved.
  • the method before the terminal device is set to be in the first mode by the user, the method further includes: the terminal device displays a message for turning on or off the first mode controls.
  • the on or off of the first mode is instructed by a network device.
  • a communication method may include: a first network device receiving fourth indication information from a terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a candidate network type of the terminal device, the terminal device
  • the candidate network type of is NTN and/or TN
  • the first network device decides whether to perform handover or release the terminal device according to the fourth indication information.
  • the terminal device can send indication information to the network device to indicate the candidate network type, so that the network device can make a handover or release decision in consideration of the candidate network type of the terminal device .
  • the first network device decides whether to perform handover or release the terminal device according to the fourth indication information, including: if the network type of the first cell is the same as the candidate network If the types do not correspond, the first network device determines to perform handover or release the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: when the first network device determines to release the terminal device, sending a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) to the terminal device ) release message, the RRC release message includes fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the first cell.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the method further includes: the first network device determines a second cell according to the fourth indication information, and the network type of the second cell corresponds to the candidate network type ; the first network device sends a handover request message to the second network device to which the second cell belongs; the first network device receives a handover confirmation message or a handover rejection message from the second network device.
  • the handover request message includes the fourth indication information.
  • the source network device ie the first network device
  • the target network device ie the second network device
  • the network device may determine to allow or deny access to the terminal device in consideration of the candidate network types of the terminal device.
  • the handover rejection message includes sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the second cell, the network type of the second cell is this NTN or this TN.
  • a communication method may include: the second network device receives a handover request message from the first network device, the handover request message includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used for Indicates a candidate network type of the terminal device, where the candidate network type of the terminal device is NTN and/or TN; the second network device determines whether to accept the terminal device to switch to the second cell according to the fourth indication information.
  • the source network device ie the first network device
  • the target network device ie the second network device
  • the network device may determine to allow or deny access to the terminal device in consideration of the candidate network types of the terminal device.
  • the second network device determines whether to accept the terminal device handover to the second cell according to the fourth indication information, including: if the network type of the second cell is the same as If the candidate network type corresponds, the second network device determines to allow the terminal device to switch to the second cell; the method further includes: the second network device sends a handover confirmation message to the first network device, and the handover confirmation message uses instructing the second network device to accept the handover of the terminal device to the second cell.
  • the second network device determines whether to accept the terminal device to access the second cell according to the fourth indication information, including: if the network type of the second cell is the same as If the candidate network types do not correspond, the second network device determines to reject the terminal device from switching to the second cell; the method further includes: the second network device sends a handover rejection message to the first network device, the handover rejection message It is used to instruct the second network device to reject the terminal device from handing over to the second cell.
  • the handover rejection message includes sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the second cell, the network type of the second cell is this NTN or this TN.
  • a fifth aspect provides a communication device, comprising a transceiver unit and a processing unit: the processing unit is configured to determine that the candidate network type includes NTN and/or TN according to a first determination result, wherein the first determination result includes at least one of the following: Judgment results: whether the communication device is in the first mode, whether the communication device has NTN access capability, whether the communication device is allowed to access the NTN, the candidate network type is used for the communication device to select a service network, in the first In one mode, the communication device selects a service network according to a first network type, and the first network type includes at least one of the following: the NTN, the TN; the processing unit is further configured to select a service network according to the candidate network type for camping or connecting enter.
  • the first mode is turned on or off by a user.
  • the processing unit is further configured to display a control for enabling or disabling the first mode.
  • the turning on or off of the first mode is instructed by a network device.
  • the processing unit is further configured to generate second indication information at the NAS, where the second indication information is used to instruct the AS of the communication device to acquire corresponding to the candidate network type The network identifier; the transceiver unit is also used to obtain one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information at the AS, and the one or more third indication information corresponds to the one or more network identifiers, The third indication information is used to indicate that the NTN and/or the TN are deployed under the corresponding network identifier; the processing unit is also used to prepare the NAS according to the one or more network identifiers and/or the one or more first The third indication information determines the service network identifier, and the service network identifier is any one of the one or more network identifiers.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine, at the NAS, the first network identifier as the serving network identifier according to a first instruction, where the first instruction is used to instruct the A network identifier is determined as the serving network identifier.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine whether the first cell satisfies a first criterion, where the first criterion is at least one network identifier of the first cell and the candidate network Type correspondence; in the case that the first cell satisfies the first criterion, the communication device camps on the first cell.
  • a communication device comprising a transceiver unit and a processing unit: the processing unit is configured to determine that the candidate network type includes NTN and/or TN according to a first determination result, wherein the first determination result includes at least one of the following: Judgment results: whether the communication device is in the first mode, whether the communication device has NTN access capability, whether the communication device is allowed to access the NTN, the candidate network type is used for the communication device to select a service network, in the first In one mode, the communication device selects a service network according to a first network type, and the first network type includes at least one of the following: the NTN, the TN; the transceiver unit is configured to send fourth indication information to the first network device, the fourth The indication information is used to indicate the candidate network type, and the fourth indication information is used for the first network device to select a target cell for the communication apparatus.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive configuration information from the first network device, where the configuration information includes information of the target cell, and the network type of the target cell is the same as that of the target cell.
  • the candidate network type corresponds; the communication device switches to the target cell.
  • the first mode is turned on or off by a user.
  • the processing unit is further configured to display a control for enabling or disabling the first mode.
  • the on or off of the first mode is instructed by the network device.
  • a communication device including a transceiver unit and a processing unit: the transceiver unit is configured to receive fourth indication information from a terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a candidate network type of the terminal device, the The candidate network type of the terminal device is NTN and/or TN; the processing unit is configured to decide whether to perform handover or release the terminal device according to the fourth indication information.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: if the network type of the first cell does not correspond to the candidate network type, determine to perform handover or release the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send an RRC release message to the terminal device when it is determined to release the terminal device, where the RRC release message includes a fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the first cell.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine a second cell according to the fourth indication information, where the network type of the second cell corresponds to the candidate network type; the transceiver unit It is also used for sending a handover request message to the second network device to which the second cell belongs; the transceiver unit is also used for receiving a handover confirmation message or a handover rejection message from the second network device.
  • the handover request message includes the fourth indication information.
  • the handover rejection message includes sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the second cell, the network type of the second cell is this NTN or this TN.
  • a communication device comprising a transceiver unit and a processing unit: the transceiver unit is configured to receive a handover request message from a first network device, the handover request message includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information Used to indicate the candidate network type of the terminal equipment, the candidate network type of the terminal equipment is NTN and/or TN; the processing unit is used to determine whether to accept the terminal equipment handover to the second cell according to the fourth indication information.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: if the network type of the second cell corresponds to the candidate network type, determine to allow the terminal device to switch to the second cell ; the transceiver unit is further configured to send a handover confirmation message to the first network device, where the handover confirmation message is used to instruct the second network device to accept the terminal device being handed over to the second cell.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: if the network type of the second cell does not correspond to the candidate network type, determine to reject the terminal device from switching to the second cell ; the transceiver unit is further configured to send a handover rejection message to the first network device, where the handover rejection message is used to instruct the second network device to reject the terminal device from handing over to the second cell.
  • the handover rejection message includes sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the second cell, the network type of the second cell is this NTN or this TN.
  • a communication apparatus including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the methods of the above-mentioned first and second aspects and any possible implementations of the first and second aspects.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
  • the communication apparatus is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a communication apparatus including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory, so as to implement the method in the third aspect and any possible implementation manner of the third aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
  • the communication apparatus is a first network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the communication apparatus is a chip configured in the first network device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a communication apparatus including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory, so as to implement the method in the fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
  • the communication apparatus is a second network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the communication apparatus is a chip configured in the second network device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes the method in any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be one or more chips
  • the input circuit may be input pins
  • the output circuit may be output pins
  • the processing circuit may be transistors, gate circuits, flip-flops and various logic circuits, etc. .
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver
  • the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by a transmitter
  • the circuit can be the same circuit that acts as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a processing apparatus including a processor and a memory.
  • the processor is configured to read the instructions stored in the memory, and can receive signals through the receiver and transmit signals through the transmitter, so as to execute the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
  • processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be provided separately from the processor.
  • the memory can be a non-transitory memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be separately set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the setting manner of the memory and the processor.
  • ROM read only memory
  • the relevant data interaction process such as sending indication information, may be a process of outputting indication information from the processor, and receiving capability information may be a process of receiving input capability information by the processor.
  • the data output by the processor can be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor can be from the receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
  • the processing device in the thirteenth aspect above may be one or more chips.
  • the processor in the processing device may be implemented by hardware or by software.
  • the processor can be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processor can be a general-purpose processor, implemented by reading software codes stored in a memory, which can Integrated in the processor, can be located outside the processor, independent existence.
  • a fourteenth aspect provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising: a computer program (also referred to as code, or instructions), which, when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned first aspect to The method in any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code, or instructions
  • a fifteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program (which may also be referred to as code, or instructions), when it is run on a computer, so that the above-mentioned first aspect to The method in any of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect is performed.
  • a computer program which may also be referred to as code, or instructions
  • a communication system including the aforementioned terminal device, a first network device and a second network device.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the method provided by this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of an air interface control plane protocol stack according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of still another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of still another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic diagram of a terminal device switching between three states.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for handover based on the Xn interface.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 show schematic block diagrams of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • 5G new radio
  • NR non-terrestrial network
  • Satellite communication systems future mobile communication systems, etc.
  • the terminal in this embodiment of the present application may refer to a device with a wireless transceiver function, which may be referred to as a terminal (terminal), user equipment (UE), mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), vehicle terminal, remote station, remote terminal, etc.
  • the specific form of the terminal can be a mobile phone, a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wearable device tablet computer (pad), a desktop computer, a notebook computer, an all-in-one computer, and a vehicle-mounted terminal.
  • wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA) and so on.
  • the terminal can be applied to the following scenarios: virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR), industrial control (industrial control), unmanned driving (self driving), remote surgery (remote medical surgery), smart grid (smart grid), transportation safety (transportation safety), smart city (smart city), smart home (smart home), etc.
  • Terminals can be fixed or mobile. It should be noted that the terminal may support at least one wireless communication technology, such as LTE, NR, wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), and the like.
  • the access network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device that provides a wireless communication function for a terminal, and may also be referred to as a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) device or the like.
  • Access network equipment includes but is not limited to: next generation node B (gNB), evolved node B (evolved node B, eNB), baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), transmitting and receiving point (transmitting and receiving) in 5G point, TRP), transmitting point (TP), relay station, access point, etc.
  • the access network device may also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU), a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU), etc. in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario.
  • the access network device may support at least one wireless communication technology, such as LTE, NR, WCDMA, and the like.
  • the access network device involved in the embodiments of this application may be a base station (eg, a gNB) in the RAN, or the like.
  • the base station may be a separate architecture of CU and DU.
  • the RAN may be connected to the core network (for example, it may be a long term evolution (LTE) core network, or a 5G core network, etc.).
  • CU and DU can be understood as the division of the base station from the perspective of logical functions. CUs and DUs can be physically separate or deployed together. Multiple DUs can share one CU. One DU can also be connected to multiple CUs (not shown in the figure).
  • the CU and the DU can be connected through an interface, such as an F1 interface. CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network.
  • a possible division method is: the CU is used to execute a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) layer, a service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) layer, and a packet data convergence layer protocol (packet data convergence layer protocol).
  • RRC radio resource control
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • Packet data convergence layer protocol packet data convergence layer protocol
  • Protocol, PDCP radio link control
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • the gNB may further include an active antenna unit (active antenna unit, AAU).
  • AAU active antenna unit
  • the CU implements some functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some functions of the gNB.
  • the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implementing functions of radio resource control (RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layers.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implementing the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, the media access control (MAC) layer and the physical (PHY) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical layer
  • the higher-layer signaling such as the RRC layer signaling
  • the access network device may be a device including one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into access network equipment in the access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into the access network equipment in the core network (core network, CN), this application does not Do limit.
  • CU and DU processing functions according to this protocol layer is only an example, and may also be divided in other ways.
  • a CU or DU may be divided into functions with more protocol layers.
  • a CU or DU can also be divided into partial processing functions with a protocol layer.
  • some functions of the RLC layer and functions of the protocol layers above the RLC layer are placed in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layers below the RLC layer are placed in the DU.
  • the functions of the CU or DU may also be divided according to service types or other system requirements. For example, according to the delay, the functions whose processing time needs to meet the delay requirements are set in the DU, and the functions that do not need to meet the delay requirements are set in the CU.
  • the CU may also have one or more functions of the core network.
  • One or more CUs can be set centrally or separately.
  • the CU can be set on the network side to facilitate centralized management.
  • the DU can have multiple radio functions, or the radio functions can be set farther away.
  • the functions of the CU can be implemented by one entity or by different entities.
  • the functions of the CU can be further segmented, for example, the control plane (CP) and the user plane (UP) can be separated, that is, the CU control plane (CU-CP) and the CU user plane (CU -UP).
  • the CU-CP and the CU-UP may be implemented by different functional entities, and the CU-CP and the CU-UP may be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the functions of the base station.
  • a terminal or an access network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • This hardware layer includes hardware such as central processing unit (CPU), memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also called main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application can be executed to provide the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal or an access network device, or a functional module in the terminal or access network device that can call and execute a program.
  • computer readable media may include, but are not limited to, magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs) etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), card, stick or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein can represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • the access network equipment and terminals can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on water; they can also be deployed on aircraft, balloons and satellites in the air.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the application scenarios of wireless access network devices and terminals.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a communication system of the present application.
  • the communication system in FIG. 2 may include at least one terminal (eg, terminal 10 , terminal 20 , terminal 30 , terminal 40 , terminal 50 and terminal 60 ) and access network equipment 70 .
  • the access network device 70 is used to provide communication services for the terminal and access the core network, and the terminal can access the network by searching for synchronization signals, broadcast signals, etc. sent by the access network device 70, so as to communicate with the network.
  • the terminal 10 , the terminal 20 , the terminal 30 , the terminal 40 and the terminal 60 in FIG. 2 can perform uplink and downlink transmission with the access network device 70 .
  • the access network device 70 can send downlink signals to terminal 10 , terminal 20 , terminal 30 , terminal 40 and terminal 60 , and can also receive uplink signals sent by terminal 10 , terminal 20 , terminal 30 , terminal 40 and terminal 60 .
  • the terminal 40 , the terminal 50 and the terminal 60 can also be regarded as a communication system, and the terminal 60 can send signals to the terminal 40 and the terminal 50 , and can also receive the signals sent by the terminal 40 and the terminal 50 . That is to say, the embodiments of the present application can be applied to downlink signal transmission, uplink signal transmission, and device to device (device to device, D2D) signal transmission.
  • the sending device is an access network device, and the corresponding receiving device is a terminal.
  • the sending device is a terminal, and the corresponding receiving device is an access network device.
  • D2D signal transmission the sending device is a terminal, and the corresponding receiving device is also a terminal.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the transmission direction of the signal.
  • the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a communication system including one or more access network devices, and may also be applied to a communication system including one or more terminals, which is not limited in this application.
  • One of the access network devices may send data or control signaling to one or more terminals.
  • Multiple access network devices can also send data or control signaling to one or more terminals at the same time.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of an air interface control plane protocol stack according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • terminals and access network equipment, or terminals and access and mobility management functions (access and mobility management functions, AMF) communicate over the air interface.
  • AMF access and mobility management functions
  • the network protocol defines several protocol stacks, and the functions of each stack are different.
  • the air interface control plane protocol stack includes a non-access stratum (non-access stratum, NAS) and an access stratum (access stratum, AS).
  • the NAS is the signaling channel between the terminal and the AMF.
  • the UE sends signaling to the access network device, and the access network device transparently transmits the signaling to the AMF.
  • the access network equipment does not perform data analysis during the transparent transmission process, and does not know the content therein.
  • NAS is mainly responsible for some management functions, such as public land mobile network (PLMN) selection, manual selection, access control, registration or subscription information, etc., and the specific process needs to be coordinated with other protocol layers.
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • AS refers to a protocol layer other than NAS.
  • the AS includes a radio resource control (RRC) layer, a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, a radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, a media Access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical (physical, PHY) layer.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media Access control
  • PHY physical (physical, PHY) layer.
  • AS is mainly responsible for switching, encryption, data retransmission, sorting or sending and other functions.
  • NAS is like a mind, used to make decisions.
  • AS is like limbs, used to do specific things.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • This scenario can be called "RAN architecture with transparent satellite".
  • the satellite is mainly used as an L1 relay (relay), that is, the physical layer signal is regenerated, which is invisible to the upper layer.
  • L1 relay relay
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • This scenario is a regenerative satellite without ISL (inter-satellite link, ISL), and the base station handles the payload (gNB processed payload).
  • the satellite acts as the base station.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of still another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • This scenario is a regenerating satellite with an ISL, and the base station handles the payload.
  • the satellite is also used as a base station.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of still another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • the satellite in this scenario is DU (NG-RAN with a regenerative satellite based on gNB-DU).
  • the RRC state of the terminal includes a connected state (RRC_CONNECTED), a deactivated state (RRC_INACTIVE) and an idle state (RRC_IDLE).
  • that the terminal is in RRC_CONNECTED indicates that the terminal has established links with the access network equipment and the core network equipment. When data arrives on the network, it can be sent directly to the terminal.
  • that the terminal is in RRC_INACTIVE indicates that the terminal has established a link with the access network device and the core network device before, but the link from the terminal to the access network device is released. Although the link between the terminal and the access network device is released, the access network device will store the context of the terminal, and when there is data to be transmitted, the access network device can quickly restore the link.
  • that the terminal is in RRC_IDLE indicates that there is no link between the terminal and the access network device.
  • RRC_INACTIVE can also be called a "third state”.
  • a PLMN is a network established and operated by the government or a government-approved operator for the purpose of providing land mobile communication services to the public.
  • the PLMN identity is composed of a mobile country code (mobile contrary code, MCC) and a mobile network number (mobile net code, MNC).
  • MCC mobile country code
  • MNC mobile network number
  • the MCC uniquely represents the country to which the mobile user belongs. For example, the MCC in China is 460.
  • MNC uniquely represents the network in the corresponding country, for example, China Mobile's global system for mobile communications (GSM) network is 00, and China Unicom's GSM network is 01.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • the terminal needs to select a network in some cases (such as after starting up), and the process of network selection is PLMN selection.
  • the AS of the terminal will read the PLMN ID list broadcast in the system message of the cell where the signal can be measured, or automatically (for example, automatically according to the PLMN priority order) at the request of the NAS. Then, the AS reports these PLMN ID lists to the NAS, and the NAS selects a PLMN ID in the PLMN ID list as the PLMN selected by the terminal.
  • AS is required by NAS or automatically scans all link channels (RF channels) of NR bandwidth (band) according to its own capability to find available PLMNs.
  • the terminal will find the cell with the best reference signal receiving power (RSRP) in each frequency point, and then read the system information block (SIB) 1 to obtain the PLMN ID.
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • the report includes the PLMN ID with the best RSRP in each cell above. Wherein, for a cell whose RSRP is less than -110 dBm, the report also includes the RSRP of the cell. For cells with RSRP greater than -110dBm, the report may not include the RSRP of the cell.
  • the selection of the PLMN can be stopped at the request of the NAS, or the AS can perform optimization according to some stored historical information (for example, frequency point information or previously received measurement configuration information).
  • PLMNs have different priorities.
  • the priority of searching for PLMNs after the terminal is powered on is as follows:
  • Registered PLMN registered PLMN, RPLMN
  • the terminal will record the PLMN registered by the terminal before shutdown.
  • Equivalent PLMN list (equivalent PLMN list, EPLMN), the PLMN list that is treated equally when the terminal performs cell selection, reselection, and handover. Furthermore, this EPLMN is provided by NAS.
  • Home PLMN home PLMN, HPLMN
  • MCC and MNC contained in the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) number on the subscriber identity module (SIM) card of the terminal are consistent with the MCC and MNC on the HPLMN.
  • IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • Equivalent HPLMN List (EHPLMN List, EHPLMN), a PLMN list that is treated the same as HPLMN.
  • the NAS After receiving the PLMN list reported by the AS, the NAS selects one of them as the PLMN used by the terminal.
  • the selection of the PLMN may be automatically selected by the NAS, or may be manually selected.
  • automatic means that the terminal is automatically completed, and does not involve human-computer interaction.
  • the NAS uploads the PLMN ID to a higher layer (eg, the application layer), and the user manually selects it. For example, after the terminal is turned on, the interface will display the words China Unicom, China Mobile, etc. for the user to choose.
  • the NAS will provide the AS with the EPLMN list and the forbidden tracking area (TA) according to the selected PLMN for the AS to use for cell selection and reselection.
  • TA forbidden tracking area
  • the UE When the terminal is powered on or the radio link fails, after completing the PLMN selection, the UE will perform a cell search process and select a suitable cell to camp on as soon as possible. This process can be called "cell selection".
  • the terminal evaluates whether the cell is a suitable cell according to the following conditions. Once the terminal finds a suitable cell, the cell selection process is complete. If the selected cell is not a suitable cell, the terminal continues to search until a suitable cell is found and camped on.
  • the cell where the terminal may reside can also be called a suitable cell, and a suitable cell needs to meet the following conditions :
  • the PLMN ID of the cell selected by the terminal belongs to the RPLMN or EPLMN list.
  • the terminal calculates whether the selected cell satisfies the S criterion by reading various parameters in the cell broadcast.
  • Srxlev and Squal are calculated as follows:
  • Srxlev refers to the level value (dB) calculated in the cell selection/reselection process
  • Q rxlevmin refers to the minimum received signal strength value required by the cell, which is indicated in q-RxLevMin of SIB1 (dBm)
  • P compensation is max(PEMAX-PUMAX, 0)(dB), where PEMAX is the maximum allowable transmit power set by the system when the terminal accesses the cell, PUMAX is the maximum output power specified according to the terminal level
  • Q rxlevminOffset is Refers to the cell's minimum reception level bias.
  • This parameter is only used when the terminal resides in the VPLMN and the cell selection evaluation is triggered due to the periodic search for a high-priority PLMN.
  • This parameter can bias the Qrxlevmin to a certain extent; Qoffset temp is a temporary offset value.
  • Squal refers to the received signal quality obtained during the cell selection/reselection process;
  • Q qualmeas is the measured reference signal received quality of the cell;
  • Q qualmin is the minimum required reference signal received quality of the cell;
  • Q qualminoffset is the offset relative to Q qualmin value.
  • At least one tracking area code (tracking area code, TAC) of the cell selected by the terminal is not in the prohibited TA.
  • Cell selection is the process of finding a suitable cell as soon as possible, and cell reselection is the process of selecting a more suitable cell.
  • the terminal will measure the neighboring cells according to the frequency and priority in the RRC release message and the broadcast message of the camped cell. These priorities are deleted after PLMN selection or RRC release message is received again).
  • the cell after cell reselection also meets the above-mentioned conditions of a suitable cell.
  • the execution measurement criteria and reselection criteria must be met.
  • Execute measurement criteria for the terminal to decide whether to start measuring the cell according to these conditions.
  • the implementation measurement criteria include:
  • the terminal For the frequency layer or system with a higher priority than the serving cell, the terminal always measures;
  • a reselection criterion which is used by the terminal to determine whether to perform cell reselection to a new cell after measurement.
  • the re-selection criteria include:
  • High-priority frequency or system reselection criteria Srxlev>Threshx,high of the target frequency cell for TreselectionRAT time, Threshx,high is the reselection decision threshold for cell reselection to high-priority cell.
  • TreselectionRAT is the timer duration for cell reselection, which is used to avoid the ping-pong effect;
  • Re-selection criteria for low-priority frequencies or systems Srxlev ⁇ Threshserving,low of the serving cell, and Srxlev>Threshx,low of the target frequency cell for TreselectionRAT time, Threshserving,low is the smallest cell that satisfies the selection or reselection conditions
  • Received power level value, Threshx, low is the reselection decision threshold for cell reselection to a low-priority cell, and the smaller the value, the more difficult it is to reselect to a low-priority cell;
  • Same-priority frequency or system reselection criteria cells reselection to the same-priority frequencies are based on the ranking criteria for intra-frequency cell reselection.
  • the same-frequency cell reselection criterion (ranking) is defined as follows, R s is the ranking value of the current serving cell, and R n is the ranking value of the neighboring cell
  • R s Q meas,s +Q hyst -Qoffset temp
  • R n Q meas,n -Q offset -Qoffset temp
  • Q hyst is the hysteresis value, which is used to prevent ping-pong reselection
  • Qmeas is the received signal strength value of the cell measured by the terminal
  • Qoffset is Qoffsets,n for the same frequency
  • Qoffsets,n for the different frequency +Qoffsetfrequency.
  • the terminal will sort the ranking values of all cells that meet the cell selection S criterion.
  • the reselection is not simply to reselect the cell with the best ranking, but to find the highest ranking value in the ranking, and the cells that are within a certain range (for example, xdB, x is pre-assigned) from the highest ranking value are considered as Close cells, among these close cells, the terminal reselects to the cell with the largest number of beams with higher beam quality.
  • the configuration parameters of the currently camped cell and neighboring cells will be broadcast in the system message of the currently camped cell, so that the terminal can calculate parameters such as R s and R n .
  • the terminal measures the cell to obtain the received signal strength value Qmeas of the cell.
  • the threshold and N are notified to the terminal in the broadcast message.
  • beams above the threshold can be considered as good beams with higher beam quality.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a handover flow based on the Xn interface.
  • the source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the connected UE.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message includes parameters such as measurement objects, measurement report configurations, and measurement identifiers.
  • the UE sends a measurement report to the source base station.
  • the UE After the UE measures a series of cells according to the RRC reconfiguration message, it forms a report and reports various events to the currently connected source base station. For example, the signal strength of the UE's current serving cell is lower than the threshold and the signal strength of the target cell is higher than the threshold.
  • the source base station makes a handover decision.
  • the source base station sends a handover request message to the target base station.
  • the source base station After receiving the measurement report reported by the UE, the source base station determines whether the UE performs handover according to the measurement report, and if the handover is decided, the source base station sends a handover request message to the target base station.
  • the target base station performs access control.
  • the target base station sends a handover request confirmation message to the source base station.
  • the target base station may decide whether to allow the UE to access according to the number of its own connections, and if the target base station allows the UE to access, the target base station sends a handover request confirmation message to the source base station.
  • the handover request confirmation message may include parameters such as a new cell radio network temporary identifier (cell radio network temporary identifier, C-RNTI), a target base station security-related algorithm, and the like.
  • the source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the UE.
  • the source base station After receiving the handover request confirmation message from the target base station, the source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the UE. What the source base station sends to the UE may also be a handover command.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message may include a handover request confirmation message sent by the target base station to the source base station, which is equivalent to the source base station layer being transparent.
  • the handover command in the NR system includes the relevant information of the target cell and the relevant configuration parameters required by the UE to access the target cell.
  • the handover command includes the information of the target cell (such as the physical cell identifier of the target cell and frequency information corresponding to the target cell), C-RNTI allocated by the target cell to the UE, random access channel (RACH) resources (such as dedicated RACH resources and/or public RACH resources) required to access the target cell, etc. .
  • RACH random access channel
  • the UE initiates random access to the target base station.
  • the UE initiates random access to the target base station according to the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the UE will disconnect from the source base station, and before the UE successfully accesses the target base station, there will be a brief interruption in the transmission and reception of data by the UE.
  • the UE sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the target base station.
  • the handover process based on the next generation (NG) interface and the handover process type based on the Xn interface only the interaction between the source base station and the target base station needs to pass through the AMF, for example, the source base station sends a handover request message to the AMF , the AMF sends the handover request message to the target base station.
  • NG next generation
  • Xn Xn
  • the prior art proposes a CHO mechanism to improve the handover success rate. That is, the source base station sends the CHO configuration information to the UE when the quality of the source link is good. Specifically, the source base station may send the CHO configuration information through an existing RRC message, or the source base station may send the CHO configuration information through a newly defined RRC message, for example, the RRC message may be a conditional RRC reconfiguration message (CondRRCReconfiguration), or May be other naming/expression forms.
  • the CHO configuration information may include a CHO trigger condition and information of one or more candidate cells (eg, the global cell identifier of the candidate cell, or the physical cell identifier of the candidate cell and frequency information corresponding to the candidate cell).
  • the UE After receiving the CHO configuration information, the UE determines whether the candidate cell satisfies the handover trigger condition according to the configuration information, and further uses a candidate cell that satisfies the handover trigger condition as the target cell; then, the UE randomly connects with the determined target cell.
  • the UE sends an RRC message (RRC reconfiguration complete message) to the base station to which the target cell belongs (ie, the target base station) to notify the target base station that the conditional handover is completed.
  • RRC message RRC reconfiguration complete message
  • Satellite communication is non-terrestrial network (NTN) communication.
  • NTN non-terrestrial network
  • the orbits of satellites can be divided into low orbit (LEO), medium orbit (MEO) and geostationary orbit (GEO) according to the altitude.
  • LEO low orbit
  • MEO medium orbit
  • GEO geostationary orbit
  • the orbital height of LEO is 160-2000km
  • the orbital height of MEO is 2000-35786km
  • the orbital height of GEO is 35786km.
  • the position of satellites operating on GEO relative to the Earth is not affected by the Earth's rotation.
  • NTN can cover various areas where terrestrial base stations are not suitable for deployment, such as deserts, deep mountains, and polar regions. But at the same time, due to the high cost of NTN deployment at the current stage, NTN is more expensive than TN. However, with the integration process of multinational space and earth, the cost of satellite launch and the development of avionics, the cost of NTN deployment is also declining.
  • NTNs With the increasing density of NTNs, the scenes overlapping with TNs also increase. And different user experience and charges between NTN and TN will make different consumers have different choices.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method for accessing a network, which can enable a terminal device to independently choose to access an NTN network or a TN network.
  • the embodiments shown below do not particularly limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be executed according to the present application. It is sufficient to communicate with the method provided by the example.
  • the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment in this community may be a terminal device, or a functional module in the terminal device that can call a program and execute the program.
  • the NTN network described below refers to a network whose network type is NTN
  • the TN network refers to a network whose network type is TN.
  • the service network described below may be a public land mobile network or a private network selected by the terminal device, or may be a cell selected by the terminal device to camp on or access.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of a method for selecting a network provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method shown in FIG. 10 may be executed by the terminal device in FIG. 2 .
  • the method shown in FIG. 10 may include S1010 and S1020, and each step will be described in detail below.
  • the terminal device determines that the candidate network types include NTN and/or TN according to the first determination result, and the first determination result includes at least one of the following determination results: whether the terminal device is in the first mode, whether the terminal device has NTN access capability, the terminal device Whether the device is allowed to access NTN.
  • the terminal device selects a service network according to a first network type, and the first network type includes at least one of the following: NTN, TN. That is, in the first mode, the type of service network selected by the terminal device is the first network type. Specifically, the first network type that the terminal device can use to select the serving network in the first mode is predefined.
  • the terminal device selects the service network according to the first network type. It can be understood that the terminal device preferentially selects a network of the first network type as the service network.
  • the first network type that the terminal device can use to select the service network is NTN. That is, in the first mode, the terminal device selects the NTN network as the service network; or the terminal device preferentially selects the NTN network as the service network.
  • the second network type that the terminal device can use to select the service network is TN. That is, if the terminal device is not in the first mode, the terminal device selects the TN network as the service network; or the terminal device preferentially selects the TN network as the service network.
  • the first network type that the terminal device can use to select the service network is TN. That is, in the first mode, the terminal device selects the TN network as the service network; or, the terminal device preferentially selects the TN network as the service network.
  • the second network type that the terminal device can use to select the service network is NTN. That is, the terminal device may select the NTN network as the service network; or the terminal device may preferentially select the NTN network as the service network.
  • the first network types that the terminal device can use to select the service network are NTN and TN. That is, in the first mode, the terminal device selects NTN or TN as the serving network. If the terminal device is not in the first mode, the second network type that the terminal device can use to select the service network is TN. That is, the terminal device may select the TN network as the service network; or, the terminal device may preferentially select the TN network as the service network.
  • the terminal device may determine the above-mentioned first network type as the candidate network type.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the manner in which the terminal device enables or disables the first mode.
  • the on or off of the first mode is indicated by the network device.
  • the terminal device determines that it is in the first mode according to the first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device is in the first mode.
  • the on or off of the first mode may be set by the user.
  • the user can turn on or turn off the first mode by clicking a preset button.
  • the terminal device before the terminal device is set to be in the first mode by the user, the terminal device presents an option of whether to set the terminal device to be in the first mode. Further, the user can set the terminal device to be in the first mode by clicking "Yes”; or, the user can set the terminal device to not be in the first mode by clicking "No".
  • the terminal device may present controls for turning off or turning on the first mode. For example, if the terminal device is in the first mode, the terminal device may display a control for turning off the first mode; if the terminal device is not in the first mode, the terminal device may display a control for turning on the first mode.
  • the terminal device may control turning on and off of the first mode through a preset touch gesture.
  • the terminal device can also control turning on and off of the first mode through a voice command.
  • Whether a terminal device has the ability to access NTN is determined by the hardware resources of the terminal device. If the terminal equipment has the ability to access NTN, the terminal equipment can select the NTN network and/or the TN network as the service network; if the terminal equipment does not have the ability to access NTN, the terminal equipment can select the TN network as the service network, and cannot select the TN network as the service network. NTN network as service network.
  • the terminal device can determine that the candidate network type is NTN and/or TN if it has the NTN access capability, or the terminal device does not have the NTN access capability. In the case of access capability, it is determined that the candidate network type is TN.
  • the subscription information of the user identity of the terminal device is determined by the subscription information of the user identity of the terminal device.
  • the user identity of the terminal device can be any of the following: a universal subscriber identity module (USIM) card, an embedded subscriber identity module (eSIM) card, a subscriber identity module (subscriber identity) module, SIM) card.
  • the subscription information of the user identity of the terminal device may include information on whether the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN, and the terminal device may obtain the subscription information of the user identity of the terminal device from the core network.
  • the terminal device can select the TN network as the service network; if the terminal device determines that it is allowed to access the NTN network according to the subscription information of the user identity, the terminal device can Select NTN network and/or TN network as service network.
  • the terminal device determines the candidate network type only according to whether it is allowed to access the NTN, the terminal device can determine that the candidate network type is the NTN network and/or the TN network when the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN, or the terminal device is not allowed to access the NTN. In the case of allowing access to the NTN network, it is determined that the candidate network type is the TN network.
  • the terminal device may also determine that the candidate network type is NTN and/or TN according to the above items.
  • the following description takes as an example that the first network type that can be used to select the service network when the terminal device is in the first mode is NTN.
  • the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it is in the first mode and has the ability to access NTN, then the terminal device can determine that the candidate network type is NTN when it is in the first mode and has the NTN access capability. Alternatively, the terminal device determines that the candidate network type is TN when it is not in the first mode and/or does not have the NTN access capability.
  • the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it is in the first mode and whether it is allowed to access NTN, the terminal device can determine that the candidate network type is NTN when it is in the first mode and is allowed to access NTN, Alternatively, the terminal device may determine that the candidate network type is TN when it is not in the first mode and/or is not allowed to access the NTN.
  • the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it has the ability to access NTN and whether it is allowed to access NTN, the terminal device can determine the candidate network when it has the ability to access NTN and is allowed to access NTN.
  • the type is NTN, or the terminal device may determine that the candidate network type is TN when it does not have the ability to access NTN and/or is not allowed to access NTN.
  • the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it is in the first mode, has the ability to access NTN, and is allowed to access NTN
  • the terminal device determines that the candidate network type is NTN if the following conditions are met: The first mode, having the ability to access NTN, and being allowed to access NTN, or, if the terminal device is not in the first mode and/or does not have NTN access capability and/or is not allowed to access NTN, determine The candidate network type is TN.
  • the terminal device selects a serving network for camping on or accessing according to the candidate network type.
  • the terminal device After determining the candidate network type, the terminal device selects the serving network according to the candidate network. That is, the public land mobile network or the private network is selected according to the candidate network type, and further, the terminal device can select a suitable cell (suitable cell) for camping or accessing.
  • the network type of the serving network selected by the terminal device belongs to the candidate network type. For example, if the candidate network type is NTN, the terminal device selects the NTN network as the service network; the candidate network type is TN, then the terminal device selects the TN network as the service network.
  • the terminal device may stay in a network of other network types. For example, the terminal device may select an acceptable cell. In this case, the terminal device cannot communicate with the network device, but can perform emergency services, such as emergency call services.
  • the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it is in the first mode, if the terminal device cannot select a service network according to the candidate network type, the terminal device can display prompt information to the user to inform the user terminal device.
  • the service network cannot be selected in the currently described mode. Further, the user can also turn off or turn on the first mode according to the prompt information.
  • the terminal device may display prompt information to the user if the service network cannot be selected. Further, the user can turn off the first mode according to the indication information. So that the terminal device can determine the candidate network type as TN, and select the TN network as the serving network.
  • the candidate network type determined by the terminal device is the network type with the highest priority in the process of selecting the serving network. For example, if the candidate network type is NTN, the terminal device preferentially selects the NTN network as the service network. If the NTN network cannot be selected, the terminal device can select the TN network as the service network; if the candidate network type is TN, the terminal device The TN network is preferentially selected as the service network. In the case where the TN network cannot be selected, the terminal device can select the NTN network as the service network.
  • the terminal device can determine that the candidate network type is NTN and/or TN according to its own capabilities, the mode it is in, and the subscription information of the user identity, so that the method for the terminal device to determine the candidate network type is no longer limited to Network control or protocol qualification.
  • the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it is in the first mode, and whether the terminal device is in the first mode is set by the user, it is equivalent to that the terminal device considers the user's needs when determining the candidate network type, so that Can improve user experience.
  • the following describes a method for a terminal device to select a service network in the case of determining a candidate network type based on the method provided by the embodiment of the present application with reference to FIG. 11 .
  • the method 1100 illustrates the method for the terminal device to perform network selection and cell selection based on the interaction between the AS layer, the NAS layer, and the application layer of the terminal device.
  • the method 1100 may include S1110 to S1170, and each step will be described in detail below.
  • the NAS layer of the terminal device sends the second indication information to the AS layer.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the AS layer to obtain the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type.
  • the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type may be understood as a network identifier corresponding to at least one network type in the candidate network types. For example, if the candidate network types are NTN and TN, the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type is the network identifier corresponding to NTN and/or TN.
  • the network selected by the terminal device is a public land mobile network (PLMN), and the network identity corresponding to the PLMN is a PLMN identity (identity, ID).
  • the network selected by the terminal device is an independent private network.
  • the network identifier corresponding to the SNPN is the SNPN ID (composed of the PLMN ID and the private network (non-public network, NPN) ID); for another example, the network selected by the terminal device is non-independent Private network (public network integrated-non-public network, PNI-NPN), the corresponding network identifier is PNI-NPN ID (composed of PLMN ID and closed access group (CAG) ID); another example, terminal The network selected by the device is a non-closed access group, and the corresponding network identifier is the CAG ID.
  • the terminal equipment selects the PLMN as an example for description, and accordingly, in the following, the network identifier is the PLMN ID as an example.
  • the second indication information instructing the AS layer to acquire the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type can be understood as the second indication information instructing the AS layer to acquire the ID of the PLMN on which the candidate network type is deployed.
  • the candidate network type is NTN
  • the second indication information instructs the AS layer to acquire the ID of the PLMN deployed with NTN
  • the candidate network type is TN
  • the second indication information instructs the AS layer to acquire the PLMN deployed with TN
  • the second indication is that at least the AS layer obtains the ID of the PLMN on which TN and/or NTN are deployed.
  • the second indication information may be used to instruct the AS layer to acquire the network identifier.
  • the AS layer can not only acquire network identifiers corresponding to the candidate network types, but also acquire network identifiers corresponding to network types other than the candidate network types.
  • the candidate network type is NTN
  • the terminal device can obtain the ID of the PLMN where NTN and/or TN are deployed.
  • the AS layer of the terminal device acquires one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information.
  • the AS layer of the terminal device can obtain one or more network identifiers. It can be understood that the AS layer can obtain one or more PLMN IDs by reading one or more received system information block 1 (system information block 1, SIB1). Specifically, the method for acquiring the PLMN ID by the AS layer may also refer to the prior art.
  • the AS layer may determine the types of networks deployed under different network identifiers according to the first mapping relationship.
  • the first mapping relationship is used to indicate the corresponding relationship between different network identifiers and different network types.
  • the AS layer obtains PLMN ID#1
  • the mapping relationship can know that TN is deployed under PLMN ID#2
  • the AS layer obtains PLMN ID#3
  • the AS layer can know that the NTN and TN are deployed under PLMN ID#3 according to the first mapping relationship
  • the AS layer obtains PLMN ID# 4.
  • the AS layer can know that the TN is deployed under the PLMN ID#4 according to the first mapping relationship.
  • the AS layer may also acquire one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information.
  • the one or more SIB1s received by the AS layer may further include a network identifier and third indication information. That is, the AS layer can also acquire one or more third indication information by reading one or more received SIB1s.
  • One or more third indication information corresponds to one or more network identifiers, and the third indication information is used to indicate that NTN and/or TN are deployed under the corresponding network identifier.
  • the correspondence between the one or more network identifiers and the one or more third indication information may be a one-to-one correspondence, or a many-to-one correspondence.
  • the AS layer receives multiple SIB1s, and each SIB1 includes a PLMN ID and a third indication information
  • the multiple PLMN IDs and the multiple third indication information may be in one-to-one correspondence. For example, as shown in Table 2.
  • SIB1 PLMN ID third indication information SIB1#1 PLMN ID#1 Third indication information #1 SIB1#2 PLMN ID#2 Third indication information #2 SIB1#3 PLMN ID#3 Third indication information #3 SIB1#4 PLMN ID#4 Third indication information #4
  • the AS layer receives multiple SIB1s, and a certain SIB1 includes multiple PLMN IDs and one third indication information
  • the multiple PLMN IDs and the multiple third indication information may be in a many-to-one correspondence. For example, as shown in Table 3.
  • the SIB1 obtained by the AS layer may include multiple PLMN IDs.
  • the SIB1#5 obtained by the AS layer includes PLMN ID#5 and PLMN ID#6. If the network types deployed under PLMN ID#5 and PLMN ID#6 are the same, SIB1#5 may include only one third indication information #5 to indicate that NTN and PLMN ID#6 are deployed under PLMN ID#5 and PLMN ID#6.
  • SIB1#5 may include two third indication information, for example, the third indication information #5 is used to indicate that under PLMN ID#5 NTN and/or TN are deployed, and the third indication information #6 is used to indicate that NTN and/or TN are deployed under PLMN ID #6.
  • the AS layer may acquire one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information in the case of receiving the second indication information.
  • the second indication information may be used to instruct the AS layer to obtain a network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type.
  • one or more network identifiers obtained by the AS layer correspond to the candidate network type.
  • the second indication information may also be used to instruct the AS layer to obtain a network identifier.
  • the AS layer may obtain a network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type, or may obtain a network identifier that does not correspond to the candidate network type.
  • the AS may automatically acquire one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information, that is, the method 1100 may not perform S1110.
  • the AS layer may acquire all available one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information, that is, the network identifier acquired by the AS layer may correspond to the candidate network type, or may correspond to the candidate network type.
  • the candidate network types do not correspond.
  • the AS layer of the terminal device sends the first information to the NAS layer.
  • the first information includes one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information.
  • the AS layer of the terminal device may acquire one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information, and further, the AS layer may acquire the acquired one or more network identifiers and/or one or more network identifiers. or multiple third indication messages are sent to the NAS layer.
  • the AS layer may send the acquired one or more network identifiers to the NAS layer , that is, the first information includes one or more network identifiers.
  • the AS layer may send the acquired one or more third indication information to the NAS layer, that is, the first information may include one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information.
  • the AS layer acquires the third indication information, it may not send the third indication information to the NAS layer.
  • the AS layer may send the acquired one or more network identifiers to the NAS layer, that is, the first information Include one or more network IDs. If the AS layer also obtains one or more third indication information, the AS layer sends one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information to the NAS layer, that is, the first information includes one or more network identifiers identification and one or more third indication information.
  • the AS layer may send the acquired one or more network identifiers to the NAS layer, that is, the first information includes one or more network identifiers. If the AS layer also acquires one or more third indication information, the AS layer sends one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information to the NAS layer, that is, the first information includes one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information.
  • the AS layer can determine the second network identifier according to one or more third indication information, and the first The second network identifier is the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type among the one or more network identifiers acquired by the AS layer. Further, the AS layer sends the second network identifier to the NAS layer.
  • the NAS layer of the terminal device determines the service network identifier.
  • the service network identifier determined by the NAS layer of the terminal device corresponds to the candidate network type, that is, the candidate network type is deployed under the service network identifier.
  • the candidate network types are deployed under the service network identifier, and at least one network type of the candidate network types is deployed under the service network identifier. For example, if the candidate network types are NTN and TN, then NTN and/or TN are deployed under the service network identifier. For example, if the candidate network type is NTN, then NTN is deployed under the PLMN ID determined by the NAS layer; for another example, if the candidate network type is TN, then TN is deployed under the PLMN ID determined by the NAS layer.
  • the NAS layer of the terminal device can automatically determine the serving network identifier. Specifically, the NAS layer may select one network identifier as the serving network identifier from among one or more network identifiers in which the candidate network type is deployed. Therefore, before determining the service network identifier, the NAS layer needs to determine whether a candidate network type is deployed under one or more network identifiers reported by the AS layer.
  • the NAS layer sends the second indication information to the AS layer, and the second indication information is used to instruct the AS layer to obtain the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type
  • the NAS layer receives the one or more network identifiers reported by the AS layer
  • Candidate network types are deployed by default under one or more network IDs.
  • the NAS layer can determine whether the one or more network identifiers reported by the AS layer are under the one or more network identifiers according to the third indication information.
  • Candidate network types are deployed.
  • the NAS layer sends the second indication information to the AS layer, and the second indication information is used to instruct the AS layer to obtain the network identifier, or the NAS layer does not send the second indication information to the AS layer, the NAS layer receives the information reported by the AS layer. After the one or more network identifiers are identified, it may be determined whether a candidate network type is deployed under the one or more network identifiers according to the first mapping relationship or the previous measurement configuration. Optionally, if the NAS receives one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information reported by the AS layer, the NAS layer can determine whether the one or more network identifiers reported by the AS layer are under the one or more network identifiers according to the third indication information. Candidate network types are deployed.
  • the service network identifier can be determined from the network identifiers of the candidate network type deployed.
  • the NAS layer of the terminal device may manually determine the serving network identifier.
  • the method 1100 may further include S1141 and S1142.
  • the NAS layer of the terminal device sends one or more network identifiers to the application layer.
  • the process of manually determining the service network identifier by the NAS layer involves human-computer interaction, that is, the NAS layer can display one or more network identifiers to the user, and the user can manually select a network identifier.
  • the NAS layer may upload one or more network identities to higher layers (eg, the application layer) for manual selection by the user.
  • the NAS layer may also send network types corresponding to one or more network identifiers to the application layer.
  • the NAS layer may also send network names (human readable names) corresponding to one or more network identifiers to the application layer, for example, China Unicom, China Mobile, and cell names (for example, Skynet).
  • network names human readable names
  • the application layer for example, China Unicom, China Mobile, and cell names (for example, Skynet).
  • the NAS layer sends all network identities received from the AS layer to the application layer. It can be understood that the network identifier sent by the NAS layer to the application layer may be a network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type, or may be a network identifier not corresponding to the candidate network type.
  • the NAS after determining that the network identifier of the candidate network type is deployed, the NAS sends the network identifier of the candidate network type deployed to the application layer.
  • the NAS layer of the terminal device receives the first instruction.
  • the first instruction is used to instruct to determine the first network identifier as the serving network identifier, where the first network identifier is one of one or more network identifiers.
  • the first instruction may be sent by the user to the NAS layer of the terminal device through the application layer.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the form of the first instruction, for example, the first instruction may be a preset touch gesture, or may be a voice instruction or the like.
  • the NAS layer sends all network identifiers obtained from the AS layer to the application layer for selection by the user, it is possible that no candidate network type is deployed under the first network identifier selected by the user.
  • the NAS layer receives the first instruction, it first determines whether the candidate network type is deployed under the first network identifier. If the candidate network type is deployed under the first network identifier, the NAS layer uses the first network identifier as the Service network ID. If no candidate network type is deployed with the first network identifier, the NAS layer sends indication information to the application layer, the indication information instructing the user to re-select until the candidate network type is deployed under the first network identifier selected by the user.
  • the NAS layer of the terminal device sends the service network identifier to the AS layer.
  • the NAS layer may also send an equivalent PLMN list and prohibited TAs to the AS layer for the AS layer to perform cell selection and reselection.
  • the terminal device determines whether the first cell satisfies the first criterion.
  • the terminal device in the case that the first cell satisfies the first criterion, the terminal device camps on the first cell.
  • the first criterion is that at least one network identifier of the first cell corresponds to the candidate network type.
  • the terminal equipment will perform cell selection/reselection when it is in the RRC idle state or the deactivated state.
  • the terminal device may consider the determined candidate network type in the process of cell selection/reselection. That is, in the process of cell selection/reselection by the terminal device, the selected first cell must not only satisfy the S criterion/reselection criterion, but also satisfy the first criterion.
  • the terminal device may preferentially select the first cell that satisfies the first criterion in the process of cell selection/reselection. It can be understood that, in this case, if the terminal device cannot select the first cell that satisfies the first criterion, it can select other cells.
  • the correspondence between the at least one network identifier of the first cell and the target network type means that a candidate network type is deployed under the at least one network identifier of the first cell.
  • the network identifiers of the first cell are PLMN ID#1 and PLMN ID#2, and the candidate network type is NTN. If NTN is not deployed under both PLMN ID#1 and PLMN ID#2, the first cell does not meet the first criterion ; If NTN is deployed under PKMN ID#1 and/or PLMN ID#2, the first cell satisfies the first criterion.
  • the terminal device can acquire the network identifiers of each cell and the network type corresponding to the network identifiers of each cell from the received SIB3, SIB4, and SIB5. Further, the terminal device may determine whether each cell satisfies the first criterion.
  • the terminal device may only measure the frequency points of the candidate network type, and only select the cell corresponding to the candidate network type, ignoring broadcast messages or RRC release messages or from other RATs. Inherited frequency priority. For example, if the candidate network type is TN, the terminal device only measures the frequency points of the TN, and only selects the TN cell.
  • the terminal device may camp on the first cell.
  • the terminal device in the process of network selection and cell selection/reselection, can flexibly select a network and a cell where NTN/TN is deployed, taking into account the candidate network type.
  • the following describes a method for a terminal device to perform cell handover when a candidate network type is determined based on the method provided by the embodiment of the present application with reference to FIG. 12 .
  • the method 1200 illustrates the method for the terminal device to perform cell handover based on the interaction between the terminal device, the first network device, and the second network device.
  • the method 1200 may include S1210 to S1270, and each step will be described in detail below.
  • the terminal device establishes a connection with the first cell.
  • the network device to which the first cell belongs is the first network device.
  • the first cell may be the first cell described in the method 1100 above, that is, it may be a cell where the terminal device chooses to camp in an idle state or a deactivated state.
  • the terminal device may send fourth indication information to the first network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the candidate network type determined by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may send fourth indication information to the first network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the candidate network type determined by the terminal device.
  • the fourth indication information sent by the terminal device to the first network device may be used to indicate one or more of the following: whether the terminal device is in the first mode, whether the terminal device has the ability to access NTN, whether the terminal device is Allow access to NTN.
  • the first network device may determine the candidate network type of the terminal device according to the fourth indication information.
  • the first network device determines the candidate network type of the terminal device, if no candidate network type is deployed under the network identifier of the first cell, the first network device refuses the terminal device to access the first cell; If a candidate network type is deployed under one network identifier, the first network device allows the terminal device to access the first cell.
  • the terminal device sends fourth indication information to the first network device.
  • the terminal device may send the fourth indication information to the first network device during the process of establishing the connection with the first cell, and after the terminal device establishes the connection with the first cell, the terminal device may also send the fourth indication information to the first network device Fourth instruction information. For example, after the terminal device establishes a connection with the first cell, if the candidate network type determined by the terminal device changes, the terminal device sends fourth indication information to the first network device to indicate the new candidate network type determined by the terminal device. .
  • the first network device makes a handover decision.
  • the first network device makes a handover decision according to the fourth indication information. That is, the first terminal device decides whether to switch or release the terminal device according to the fourth indication information.
  • the first network device can release the terminal equipment.
  • the method 1200 executes S1241, and the first network device sends an RRC release message to the terminal device to instruct the terminal device to release the connection with the first cell.
  • the RRC release message may include fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the first cell.
  • the terminal device may determine, according to the fifth indication information, that the reason for the release is that the network type of the first cell does not match the network type of the target cell.
  • the first network device determines to assign the terminal device Switch to the second cell.
  • the first cell may be referred to as a source cell, and the first network device may be referred to as a source network device; the second cell may be referred to as a target cell, and the second network device may be referred to as a target network device.
  • the method 1200 executes S1242, and the first network device sends a handover request message to the second network device.
  • the second network device is a network device to which the second cell belongs.
  • the handover request message may include fourth indication information.
  • the second network device may determine the candidate network type of the terminal device according to the fourth indication information. Further, the second network device may determine whether to allow the terminal device to access the second cell according to the candidate network type of the terminal device and the network type of the second cell.
  • the second network device may allow the terminal device to access the second cell. Further, the method 1200 executes S1251, and the second network device sends a handover signal to the first network device. The confirmation message is used to instruct the second network device to allow the terminal device to access the second cell.
  • the second network device may refuse the terminal device to access the second cell. Further, the method 1200 executes S1252, and the second network device sends a handover signal to the first network device. The rejection message is used to instruct the second network device to reject the terminal device from accessing the second cell.
  • the handover rejection message may further include sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the second cell.
  • the first network device may determine, according to the sixth indication information, that the reason why the second network device refuses the terminal device to access the second cell is that the network type does not match.
  • the method 1200 may further perform S1260 and S1270.
  • the second network device sends RRC configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the RRC configuration information includes information of the second cell.
  • the terminal device switches to the second cell.
  • the embodiments of the present application only take the common handover of the Xn interface as an example for description, and the embodiments of the present application may also be applied to the CHO mechanism or the dual active protocol stack handover (DAPS HO), or the present application Embodiments can also be applied to NG interface based handovers.
  • DAPS HO dual active protocol stack handover
  • the terminal device in the process of cell access and handover, can send indication information to the network device to indicate the candidate network type, so that the network device can determine the candidate network type in consideration of the terminal device's network type. Allow or deny end device access.
  • the terminal device and/or the network device may execute some or all of the steps in the embodiments. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations. In addition, various steps may be performed in different orders presented in various embodiments, and may not be required to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application. Moreover, the size of the sequence number of each step does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 2000 may include a processing unit 2100 and a transceiver unit 2200 .
  • the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiments, for example, may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the terminal equipment in the methods 1000 to 1200 according to the embodiments of the present application, and the communication apparatus 2000 may include a method for executing the method 1000 in FIG. 10 , the method 1100 in FIG. 11 , and the method in FIG. 12 . Elements of the method performed by the terminal device in the method 1200 in .
  • each unit in the communication device 2000 and the above other operations and/or functions are respectively to implement the corresponding flow of the method 1000 in FIG. 10 , the method 1100 in FIG. 11 , and the method 1200 in FIG. 12 . It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the above-mentioned corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the transceiver unit 2200 in the communication apparatus 2000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 3020 in the communication apparatus 3000 shown in FIG. 14 or the transceiver 3020 shown in FIG. 15 .
  • the transceiver 4020 in the terminal device 4000 is output.
  • the processing unit 2100 in the communication apparatus 2000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 3010 in the communication apparatus 3000 shown in FIG. 14 or the processor 4010 in the terminal device 4000 shown in FIG. 15 .
  • the transceiver unit 2200 in the communication apparatus 2000 may be implemented through input/output interfaces, circuits, etc., and the processing unit 2100 in the communication apparatus 2000 It can be implemented by a processor, microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
  • the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiments, for example, may be a network device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device.
  • a component such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the network device in the method 1200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 2000 may include a unit for executing the method performed by the network device in the method 1200 in FIG. 12 . Moreover, each unit in the communication apparatus 2000 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 1200 in FIG. 12 . It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the above-mentioned corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the transceiver unit 2200 in the communication apparatus 2000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 3020 in the communication apparatus 3000 shown in FIG. 14 or the transceiver 3020 shown in FIG. 16 .
  • the RRU 5100 in the outgoing base station 5000, the processing unit 2100 in the communication device 2000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 3010 in the communication device 3000 shown in FIG. 14 or the processor 3010 shown in FIG. 16 .
  • the transceiver unit 2200 in the communication apparatus 2000 may be implemented through input/output interfaces, circuits, etc., and the processing unit 2100 in the communication apparatus 2000 It can be implemented by a processor, microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
  • FIG. 14 is another schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus 3000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 3000 includes a processor 3010 , a transceiver 3020 and a memory 3030 .
  • the processor 3010, the transceiver 3020 and the memory 3030 communicate with each other through an internal connection path, the memory 3030 is used to store instructions, and the processor 3010 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 3030 to control the transceiver 3020 to send signals and / or receive signals.
  • the communication apparatus 3000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiments, and may be used to execute various steps and/or processes performed by the network device or the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
  • the memory 3030 may include read only memory and random access memory and provide instructions and data to the processor. A portion of the memory may also include non-volatile random access memory.
  • the memory 3030 may be a separate device or may be integrated in the processor 3010 .
  • the processor 3010 may be configured to execute the instructions stored in the memory 3030, and when the processor 3010 executes the instructions stored in the memory, the processor 3010 is configured to execute each of the foregoing method embodiments corresponding to the network device or the terminal device steps and/or processes.
  • the communication apparatus 3000 is the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the communication apparatus 3000 is the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the transceiver 3020 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 3020 may further include antennas, and the number of the antennas may be one or more.
  • the processor 3010, the memory 3030 and the transceiver 3020 may be devices integrated on different chips.
  • the processor 3010 and the memory 3030 may be integrated in the baseband chip, and the transceiver 3020 may be integrated in the radio frequency chip.
  • the processor 3010, the memory 3030 and the transceiver 3020 may also be devices integrated on the same chip. This application does not limit this.
  • the communication apparatus 3000 is a component configured in a terminal device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and the like.
  • the communication apparatus 3000 is a component configured in a network device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and the like.
  • the transceiver 3020 may also be a communication interface, such as an input/output interface, a circuit, and the like.
  • the transceiver 3020, the processor 3010 and the memory 3020 can be integrated in the same chip, such as integrated in a baseband chip.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 4000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 4000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the terminal device 4000 includes a processor 4010 and a transceiver 4020 .
  • the terminal device 4000 further includes a memory 4030 .
  • the processor 4010, the transceiver 4020 and the memory 4030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transmit control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 4030 is used to store computer programs, and the processor 4010 is used to retrieve data from the memory 4030.
  • the computer program is called and executed to control the transceiver 4020 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device 4000 may further include an antenna 4040 for sending the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 4020 through wireless signals.
  • the above-mentioned processor 4010 and the memory 4030 can be combined into a processing device, and the processor 4010 is configured to execute the program codes stored in the memory 4030 to realize the above-mentioned functions.
  • the memory 4030 may also be integrated in the processor 4010 or independent of the processor 4010 .
  • the processor 4010 may correspond to the processing unit 2100 in FIG. 13 or the processor 3010 in FIG. 14 .
  • the transceiver 4020 described above may correspond to the transceiver unit 2200 in FIG. 13 or the transceiver 3020 in FIG. 14 .
  • the transceiver 4020 may include a receiver (or called receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or called transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used for receiving signals, and the transmitter is used for transmitting signals.
  • the terminal device 4000 shown in FIG. 15 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiments shown in FIGS. 10 to 12 .
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 4000 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned processor 4010 may be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that are implemented inside the terminal device, and the transceiver 4020 may be used to perform the operations described in the foregoing method embodiments that the terminal device sends to or receives from the network device. action.
  • the transceiver 4020 may be used to perform the operations described in the foregoing method embodiments that the terminal device sends to or receives from the network device. action.
  • the above-mentioned terminal device 4000 may further include a power supply 4050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 4000 may further include one or more of an input unit 4060, a display unit 4070, an audio circuit 4080, a camera 4090, a sensor 4100, etc., the audio circuit Speakers 4082, microphones 4084, etc. may also be included.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may be, for example, a schematic structural diagram of a base station.
  • the base station 5000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the base station 5000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 5100 and one or more baseband units (BBUs) (also referred to as distributed units (DUs). )) 5200.
  • RRU 5100 may be called a transceiver unit, which may correspond to the transceiver unit 2200 in FIG. 13 or the transceiver 3020 in FIG. 14 .
  • the RRU 5100 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 5101 and a radio frequency unit 5102.
  • the RRU 5100 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or called a receiver, a receiving circuit), and the sending unit may correspond to a transmitter (or called a transmitter, a sending circuit).
  • the part of the RRU 5100 is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending indication information to terminal equipment.
  • the part of the BBU 5200 is mainly used to perform baseband processing and control the base station.
  • the RRU 5100 and the BBU 5200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 5200 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing unit, which can correspond to the processing unit 2100 in FIG. 13 or the processor 3010 in FIG. 14 , and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing , modulation, spread spectrum, etc.
  • the BBU processing unit
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to perform the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information and the like.
  • the BBU 5200 may be composed of one or more boards, and the multiple boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or may respectively support a wireless access network of different access standards.
  • Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network).
  • the BBU 5200 also includes a memory 5201 and a processor 5202.
  • the memory 5201 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 5202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation flow of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the memory 5201 and the processor 5202 may serve one or more single boards. That is to say, the memory and processor can be provided separately on each single board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits may also be provided on each single board.
  • the base station 5000 shown in FIG. 16 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 12 .
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the base station 5000 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned BBU 5200 can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that are implemented internally by the network device, while the RRU 5100 can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the RRU 5100 can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the base station 5000 shown in FIG. 16 is only a possible form of network equipment, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
  • the method provided in this application can be applied to other forms of network equipment.
  • it includes AAU, may also include CU and/or DU, or includes BBU and adaptive radio unit (ARU), or BBU; may also be customer terminal equipment (customer premises equipment, CPE), may also be
  • AAU adaptive radio unit
  • BBU adaptive radio unit
  • CPE customer premises equipment
  • the CU and/or DU may be used to perform the actions implemented by the network device described in the foregoing method embodiments, and the AAU may be used to execute the network device described in the foregoing method embodiments to send or receive from the terminal device. Actions. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the present application also provides a processing apparatus, including at least one processor, where the at least one processor is configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the processing apparatus executes the terminal device or network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments method performed.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a processing apparatus, which includes a processor and a communication interface.
  • the communication interface is coupled with the processor.
  • the communication interface is used to input and/or output information.
  • the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the processing apparatus executes the method executed by the terminal device or the network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a processing apparatus, including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the processing apparatus executes the method performed by the terminal device or the network device in any of the above method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned processing device may be one or more chips.
  • the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or a It is a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • MCU microcontroller unit
  • MCU programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • each step of the above-mentioned method can be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here.
  • the processor in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability.
  • each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the aforementioned processors may be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application can be implemented or executed.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the steps shown in FIGS. 10 to 12 .
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores program codes, and when the program codes are executed on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIGS. 10 to 10 .
  • FIGS. 10 to 10 a method performed by a terminal device or a method performed by a network device.
  • the present application further provides a system, which includes one or more of the aforementioned terminal devices and/or one or more of the aforementioned network devices.
  • the network equipment in each of the above apparatus embodiments completely corresponds to the terminal equipment and the network equipment or terminal equipment in the method embodiments, and corresponding steps are performed by corresponding modules or units.
  • a processing unit processor
  • processor For functions of specific units, reference may be made to corresponding method embodiments.
  • the number of processors may be one or more.
  • the terminal device may be used as an example of a receiving device
  • the network device may be used as an example of a sending device.
  • the sending device and the receiving device may both be terminal devices or the like. This application does not limit the specific types of the sending device and the receiving device.
  • a component may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer.
  • an application running on a computing device and the computing device may be components.
  • One or more components may reside within a process and/or thread of execution, and a component may be localized on one computer and/or distributed between 2 or more computers.
  • these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • a component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • data packets eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides a network and communication selection method and a communication apparatus. The network selection method comprises: a terminal device determines, according to a first determination result, that a candidate network type comprises a non-terrestrial network (NTN) and/or a terrestrial network (TN), the first determination result comprising at least one of the following determination results: whether the terminal device is in a first mode, whether the terminal device has an NTN access capability, and whether the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN, the candidate network type being used for the terminal device to select a service network, and in the first mode, the terminal device selecting a service network according to a first network type, the first network type comprising at least one of: the NTN and the TN; and the terminal device selects, according to the candidate network type, a service network to camp on or access. By means of the method provided in embodiments of the present application, the terminal device can autonomously select to access the NTN or the TN.

Description

选择网络和通信的方法及通信装置Method and communication device for network selection and communication 技术领域technical field
本申请涉及无线通信领域，并且更具体地，涉及一种选择网络和通信的方法及通信装置。The present application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more particularly, to a method and communication device for selecting a network and communication.
背景技术Background technique
非地面网络通信(non-terrestrial network，NTN)***(或者称为“卫星通信***”)作为一种新型通信方式，可以覆盖海洋、沙漠、深山和极地等各种地面接入网设备不适合部署的区域，具有覆盖广的优点。但是，由于卫星距离地面较远，NTN通信中的时延会比较大，同时，目前的NTN网络的部署成本比较高。As a new communication method, non-terrestrial network (NTN) system (or "satellite communication system") can cover various terrestrial access network equipment such as oceans, deserts, deep mountains and polar regions. It is not suitable for deployment. area, has the advantage of wide coverage. However, since the satellite is far from the ground, the time delay in the NTN communication will be relatively large, and at the same time, the deployment cost of the current NTN network is relatively high.
随着天地一体化进程的发展、卫星发射成本的下降、航空微电子的发展，NTN网络的部署成本有可能逐渐下降。随着NTN网络的日益密集，与地面网络(terrestrial network，TN)交叠的场景也越来越多。由于NTN与TN的部署方式和成本不同，NTN和TN之间的用户体验和收费都不同。目前，终端选择TN还是选择NTN都是由网络控制或协议限定的，导致用户体验不佳。With the development of space-earth integration, the decline of satellite launch costs, and the development of avionics, the deployment cost of NTN networks may gradually decline. As the NTN network becomes denser, more and more scenarios overlap with the terrestrial network (TN). Due to the different deployment methods and costs of NTN and TN, the user experience and charges are different between NTN and TN. Currently, whether a terminal selects TN or NTN is limited by network control or protocol, resulting in poor user experience.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请提供一种选择网络和通信的方法及通信装置，可以使得终端设备自主选择接入NTN网络或TN网络。The present application provides a method and a communication device for selecting a network and communication, which can enable a terminal device to independently choose to access an NTN network or a TN network.
第一方面，提供了一种选择网络的方法，该方法可以包括：终端设备根据第一判定结果确定候选网络类型包括NTN和/或TN，其中，该第一判定结果包括以下至少一种判定结果：该终端设备是否处于第一模式、该终端设备是否具备NTN接入能力、该终端设备是否被允许接入该NTN，该候选网络类型用于该终端设备选择服务网络，在该第一模式下该终端设备根据第一网络类型选择服务网络，该第一网络类型包括以下至少一个：该NTN、该TN；该终端设备根据该候选网络类型选择服务网络进行驻留或接入。In a first aspect, a method for selecting a network is provided, the method may include: the terminal device determines that the candidate network types include NTN and/or TN according to a first determination result, wherein the first determination result includes at least one of the following determination results : Whether the terminal device is in the first mode, whether the terminal device has NTN access capability, whether the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN, the candidate network type is used for the terminal device to select a service network, in the first mode The terminal device selects a service network according to a first network type, and the first network type includes at least one of the following: the NTN, the TN; the terminal device selects a service network according to the candidate network type for camping or accessing.
基于上述技术方案，终端设备可以根据自身的能力、所处的模式、是否被允许接入NTN确定候选网络类型，从而使得终端设备确定候选网络类型的方式不再局限于网络控制或协议限定。Based on the above technical solutions, the terminal device can determine the candidate network type according to its own capabilities, the mode it is in, and whether it is allowed to access the NTN, so that the way the terminal device determines the candidate network type is no longer limited to network control or protocol limitations.
终端设备是否被允许接入NTN可用由终端设备的用户身份的签约信息确定。在此情况下，由于用户可以根据自己的需求订购不同的签约服务，相当于终端设备在确定候选网络类型时，可以考虑用户的需求，因此可以提升用户体验。Whether a terminal device is allowed to access NTN can be determined by subscription information of the user identity of the terminal device. In this case, since the user can order different subscription services according to their own needs, it is equivalent that the terminal device can consider the user's needs when determining the candidate network type, so the user experience can be improved.
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该方法还包括：该该第一模式的开启或关闭由用户设置。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: enabling or disabling the first mode is set by a user.
基于上述技术方案，在终端设备是否处于第一模式是由用户设置的情况下，相当于终端设备在确定候选网络类型时，考虑了用户的需求，从而可以提升用户体验。Based on the above technical solutions, in the case that whether the terminal device is in the first mode is set by the user, it is equivalent that the terminal device considers the user's needs when determining the candidate network type, so that the user experience can be improved.
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该方法还包括：该终端设备展示用于开启或关闭该第一模式的控件。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: displaying, by the terminal device, a control for enabling or disabling the first mode.
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该第一模式的开启或关闭由网络设备指示。In conjunction with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the on or off of the first mode is instructed by a network device.
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该方法还包括：该终端设备在非接入层(non-access statum，NAS)生成第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示该终端设备的接入层(access statum，AS)获取与该候选网络类型对应的网络标识；该终端设备在AS获取一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息，该一个或多个第三指示信息与该一个或多个网络标识对应，该第三指示信息用于指示所对应的网络标识下部署了该NTN和/或该TN；该终端设备在NAS根据该一个或多个网络标识和/或该一个或多个第三指示信息确定服务网络标识，该服务网络标识是该一个或多个网络标识中的任意一个。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the terminal device generates second indication information at a non-access statum (NAS), where the second indication information is used for Instruct the access layer (access statum, AS) of the terminal device to obtain a network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type; the terminal device obtains one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information at the AS, the One or more third indication information corresponds to the one or more network identifiers, and the third indication information is used to indicate that the NTN and/or the TN are deployed under the corresponding network identifier; The one or more network identifiers and/or the one or more third indication information determine a service network identifier, where the serving network identifier is any one of the one or more network identifiers.
基于上述技术方案，终端设备在进行网络选择的过程中，可以在考虑候选网络类型的情况下，灵活地选择部署了NTN/TN的网络。Based on the above technical solutions, in the process of network selection, the terminal device can flexibly select a network in which NTN/TN is deployed while considering candidate network types.
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该终端设备在NAS根据该一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息确定服务网络标识，包括：该终端设备在NAS根据第一指令将第一网络标识确定为该服务网络标识，该第一指令用于指示将该第一网络标识确定为该服务网络标识。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the terminal device determines the service network identifier at the NAS according to the one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information, including: the terminal device The NAS determines the first network identifier as the serving network identifier according to the first instruction, where the first instruction is used to instruct to determine the first network identifier as the serving network identifier.
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该方法还包括：该终端设备在AS获取一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息，该一个或多个第三指示信息与该一个或多个网络标识对应，该第三指示信息用于指示所对应的网络标识下部署了该NTN和/或该TN；该终端设备在NAS根据该一个或多个网络标识和/或该一个或多个第三指示信息确定服务网络标识，该服务网络标识是该一个或多个网络标识中的任意一个。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the terminal device acquires one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information in the AS, the one or more The third indication information corresponds to the one or more network identifiers, and the third indication information is used to indicate that the NTN and/or the TN are deployed under the corresponding network identifiers; The identity and/or the one or more third indication information determine a service network identity, where the service network identity is any one of the one or more network identities.
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该方法还包括：该终端设备在AS根据该一个或多个第三指示信息确定第二网络标识，该第二网络标识是该一个或多个网络标识中与候选网络类型对应的网络标识；该终端设备在NAS根据该第二网络标识确定服务网络标识。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the terminal device determines, at the AS, a second network identifier according to the one or more third indication information, where the second network identifier is the one or a network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type among the multiple network identifiers; the terminal device determines the serving network identifier in the NAS according to the second network identifier.
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该方法还包括：该终端设备确定第一小区是否满足第一准则，该第一准则为该第一小区的至少一个网络标识与该候选网络类型对应；在该第一小区满足该第一准则的情况下，该终端设备驻留在该第一小区。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: determining, by the terminal device, whether the first cell satisfies a first criterion, where the first criterion is at least one network identifier of the first cell and the The candidate network type corresponds; in the case that the first cell satisfies the first criterion, the terminal device camps on the first cell.
基于上述技术方案，终端设备在进行小区选择/重新的过程中，可以在考虑候选网络类型的情况下，灵活地选择部署了NTN/TN的小区。Based on the above-mentioned technical solutions, in the process of cell selection/reactivation, the terminal device can flexibly select the cell where the NTN/TN is deployed while considering the candidate network type.
第二方面，提供了一种通信的方法，该方法可以包括：终端设备根据第一判定结果确定候选网络类型包括NTN和/或TN，其中，该第一判定结果包括以下至少一种判定结果：该终端设备是否处于第一模式、该终端设备是否具备NTN接入能力、该终端设备是否被允许接入该NTN，该候选网络类型用于该终端设备选择服务网络，在该第一模式下该终端设备根据第一网络类型选择服务网络，该第一网络类型包括以下至少一个：该NTN、该TN；该终端设备向第一网络设备发送第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该候选网络类型，该第四指示信息用于该第一网络设备为该终端设备选择目标小区。In a second aspect, a communication method is provided, the method may include: the terminal device determines that the candidate network type includes NTN and/or TN according to a first determination result, wherein the first determination result includes at least one of the following determination results: Whether the terminal device is in the first mode, whether the terminal device has NTN access capability, whether the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN, the candidate network type is used for the terminal device to select a service network, in the first mode, the The terminal device selects a service network according to a first network type, where the first network type includes at least one of the following: the NTN and the TN; the terminal device sends fourth indication information to the first network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the Candidate network type, the fourth indication information is used by the first network device to select a target cell for the terminal device.
基于上述技术方案，终端设备可以根据自身的能力、所处的模式、是否被允许接入 NTN确定候选网络类型，从而使得终端设备确定候选网络类型的方式不再局限于网络控制或协议限定。Based on the above technical solutions, the terminal device can determine the candidate network type according to its own capabilities, the mode it is in, and whether it is allowed to access the NTN, so that the way the terminal device determines the candidate network type is no longer limited to network control or protocol limitations.
终端设备是否被允许接入NTN可用由终端设备的用户身份的签约信息确定。在此情况下，由于用户可以根据自己的需求订购不同的签约服务，相当于终端设备在确定候选网络类型时，可以考虑用户的需求，因此可以提升用户体验。Whether a terminal device is allowed to access NTN can be determined by subscription information of the user identity of the terminal device. In this case, since the user can order different subscription services according to their own needs, it is equivalent that the terminal device can consider the user's needs when determining the candidate network type, so the user experience can be improved.
终端设备向网络设备发送指示信息以指示候选网络类型，从而使得网络设备可以在考虑终端设备的候选网络类型的情况下，为终端设备选择目标小区。The terminal device sends indication information to the network device to indicate the candidate network type, so that the network device can select a target cell for the terminal device in consideration of the candidate network type of the terminal device.
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该方法还包括：该终端设备接收来自该第一网络设备的配置信息，该配置信息包括该目标小区的信息，该目标小区的网络类型与该候选网络类型对应；该终端设备切换到该目标小区。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the terminal device receiving configuration information from the first network device, the configuration information including the information of the target cell, the network of the target cell The type corresponds to the candidate network type; the terminal device is handed over to the target cell.
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该第一模式的开启或关闭由用户设置。In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first mode is turned on or off by a user.
基于上述技术方案，在终端设备是否处于第一模式是由用户设置的情况下，相当于终端设备在确定候选网络类型时，考虑了用户的需求，从而可以提升用户体验。Based on the above technical solutions, in the case that whether the terminal device is in the first mode is set by the user, it is equivalent that the terminal device considers the user's needs when determining the candidate network type, so that the user experience can be improved.
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，在该终端设备被用户设置为处于该第一模式之前，该方法还包括：该终端设备展示用于开启或关闭该第一模式的控件。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, before the terminal device is set to be in the first mode by the user, the method further includes: the terminal device displays a message for turning on or off the first mode controls.
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该第一模式的开启或关闭由网络设备指示。In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the on or off of the first mode is instructed by a network device.
第三方面，提供了一种通信的方法，该方法可以包括：第一网络设备接收来自终端设备的第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备的候选网络类型，该终端设备的候选网络类型是NTN和/或TN；该第一网络设备根据该第四指示信息决策是否进行切换或释放该终端设备。In a third aspect, a communication method is provided, the method may include: a first network device receiving fourth indication information from a terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a candidate network type of the terminal device, the terminal device The candidate network type of is NTN and/or TN; the first network device decides whether to perform handover or release the terminal device according to the fourth indication information.
基于上述技术方案，在进行小区切换的过程中，终端设备可以向网络设备发送指示信息以指示候选网络类型，从而使得网络设备可以在考虑终端设备的候选网络类型的情况下，进行切换或释放决定。Based on the above technical solutions, in the process of cell handover, the terminal device can send indication information to the network device to indicate the candidate network type, so that the network device can make a handover or release decision in consideration of the candidate network type of the terminal device .
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该第一网络设备根据该第四指示信息决策是否进行切换或释放该终端设备，包括：若第一小区的网络类型与该候选网络类型不对应，则该第一网络设备确定进行切换或释放该终端设备。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first network device decides whether to perform handover or release the terminal device according to the fourth indication information, including: if the network type of the first cell is the same as the candidate network If the types do not correspond, the first network device determines to perform handover or release the terminal device.
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第一网络设备在确定释放该终端设备的情况下，向该终端设备发送无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)释放消息，该RRC释放消息中包括第五指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示第一小区的的网络类型。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: when the first network device determines to release the terminal device, sending a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) to the terminal device ) release message, the RRC release message includes fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the first cell.
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第一网络设备根据该第四指示信息确定第二小区，该第二小区的网络类型与该候选网络类型对应；该第一网络设备向该第二小区所属的第二网络设备发送切换请求消息；该第一网络设备接收来自该第二网络设备的切换确认消息或切换拒绝消息。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: the first network device determines a second cell according to the fourth indication information, and the network type of the second cell corresponds to the candidate network type ; the first network device sends a handover request message to the second network device to which the second cell belongs; the first network device receives a handover confirmation message or a handover rejection message from the second network device.
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该切换请求消息中包括该第四指示信息。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the handover request message includes the fourth indication information.
基于上述技术方案，在进行小区切换的过程中，源网络设备(即第一网络设备)可以向目标网络设备(即第二网络设备)发送指示信息以指示终端设备的候选网络类型，从而 使得目标网络设备可以在考虑终端设备的候选网络类型的情况下，确定允许或拒绝终端设备接入。Based on the above technical solutions, in the process of cell handover, the source network device (ie the first network device) can send indication information to the target network device (ie the second network device) to indicate the candidate network type of the terminal device, so that the target network device The network device may determine to allow or deny access to the terminal device in consideration of the candidate network types of the terminal device.
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该切换拒绝消息中包括第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于指示该第二小区的网络类型，该第二小区的网络类型是该NTN或该TN。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the handover rejection message includes sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the second cell, the network type of the second cell is this NTN or this TN.
第四方面，提供了一种通信的方法，该方法可以包括：第二网络设备接收来自第一网络设备的切换请求消息，该切换请求消息中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示终端设备的候选网络类型，该终端设备的候选网络类型是NTN和/或TN；该第二网络设备根据该第四指示信息确定是否接受该终端设备切换到第二小区。In a fourth aspect, a communication method is provided, the method may include: the second network device receives a handover request message from the first network device, the handover request message includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used for Indicates a candidate network type of the terminal device, where the candidate network type of the terminal device is NTN and/or TN; the second network device determines whether to accept the terminal device to switch to the second cell according to the fourth indication information.
基于上述技术方案，在进行小区切换的过程中，源网络设备(即第一网络设备)可以向目标网络设备(即第二网络设备)发送指示信息以指示终端设备的候选网络类型，从而使得目标网络设备可以在考虑终端设备的候选网络类型的情况下，确定允许或拒绝终端设备接入。Based on the above technical solutions, in the process of cell handover, the source network device (ie the first network device) can send indication information to the target network device (ie the second network device) to indicate the candidate network type of the terminal device, so that the target network device The network device may determine to allow or deny access to the terminal device in consideration of the candidate network types of the terminal device.
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该第二网络设备根据该第四指示信息确定是否接受该终端设备切换到第二小区，包括：若该第二小区的网络类型与该候选网络类型对应，则该第二网络设备确定允许该终端设备切换到该第二小区；该方法还包括：该第二网络设备向该第一网络设备发送切换确认消息，该切换确认消息用于指示该第二网络设备接受该终端设备切换到该第二小区。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the second network device determines whether to accept the terminal device handover to the second cell according to the fourth indication information, including: if the network type of the second cell is the same as If the candidate network type corresponds, the second network device determines to allow the terminal device to switch to the second cell; the method further includes: the second network device sends a handover confirmation message to the first network device, and the handover confirmation message uses instructing the second network device to accept the handover of the terminal device to the second cell.
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该第二网络设备根据该第四指示信息确定是否接受该终端设备接入第二小区，包括：若该第二小区的网络类型与该候选网络类型不对应，则该第二网络设备确定拒绝该终端设备切换到该第二小区；该方法还包括：该第二网络设备向该第一网络设备发送切换拒绝消息，该切换拒绝消息用于指示该第二网络设备拒绝该终端设备切换到该第二小区。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the second network device determines whether to accept the terminal device to access the second cell according to the fourth indication information, including: if the network type of the second cell is the same as If the candidate network types do not correspond, the second network device determines to reject the terminal device from switching to the second cell; the method further includes: the second network device sends a handover rejection message to the first network device, the handover rejection message It is used to instruct the second network device to reject the terminal device from handing over to the second cell.
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该切换拒绝消息中包括第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于指示该第二小区的网络类型，该第二小区的网络类型是该NTN或该TN。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the handover rejection message includes sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the second cell, the network type of the second cell is this NTN or this TN.
第五方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括收发单元和处理单元：该处理单元用于根据第一判定结果确定候选网络类型包括NTN和/或TN，其中，该第一判定结果包括以下至少一种判定结果：该通信装置是否处于第一模式、该通信装置是否具备NTN接入能力、该通信装置是否被允许接入该NTN，该候选网络类型用于该通信装置选择服务网络，在该第一模式下该通信装置根据第一网络类型选择服务网络，该第一网络类型包括以下至少一个：该NTN、该TN；该处理单元还用于根据该候选网络类型选择服务网络进行驻留或接入。A fifth aspect provides a communication device, comprising a transceiver unit and a processing unit: the processing unit is configured to determine that the candidate network type includes NTN and/or TN according to a first determination result, wherein the first determination result includes at least one of the following: Judgment results: whether the communication device is in the first mode, whether the communication device has NTN access capability, whether the communication device is allowed to access the NTN, the candidate network type is used for the communication device to select a service network, in the first In one mode, the communication device selects a service network according to a first network type, and the first network type includes at least one of the following: the NTN, the TN; the processing unit is further configured to select a service network according to the candidate network type for camping or connecting enter.
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些实现方式中，该第一模式的开启或关闭由用户设置。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the first mode is turned on or off by a user.
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元还用于展示用于开启或关闭该第一模式的控件。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to display a control for enabling or disabling the first mode.
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些实现方式中，该第一模式的开启或关闭由网络设备指示。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the turning on or off of the first mode is instructed by a network device.
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元还用于在NAS生成第二 指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示该通信装置的AS获取与该候选网络类型对应的网络标识；该收发单元还用于在AS获取一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息，该一个或多个第三指示信息与该一个或多个网络标识对应，该第三指示信息用于指示所对应的网络标识下部署了该NTN和/或该TN；该处理单元还用于备在NAS根据该一个或多个网络标识和/或该一个或多个第三指示信息确定服务网络标识，该服务网络标识是该一个或多个网络标识中的任意一个。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to generate second indication information at the NAS, where the second indication information is used to instruct the AS of the communication device to acquire corresponding to the candidate network type The network identifier; the transceiver unit is also used to obtain one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information at the AS, and the one or more third indication information corresponds to the one or more network identifiers, The third indication information is used to indicate that the NTN and/or the TN are deployed under the corresponding network identifier; the processing unit is also used to prepare the NAS according to the one or more network identifiers and/or the one or more first The third indication information determines the service network identifier, and the service network identifier is any one of the one or more network identifiers.
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元还用于在NAS根据第一指令将第一网络标识确定为该服务网络标识，该第一指令用于指示将该第一网络标识确定为该服务网络标识。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to determine, at the NAS, the first network identifier as the serving network identifier according to a first instruction, where the first instruction is used to instruct the A network identifier is determined as the serving network identifier.
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元还用于确定第一小区是否满足第一准则，该第一准则为该第一小区的至少一个网络标识与该候选网络类型对应；在该第一小区满足该第一准则的情况下，该通信装置驻留在该第一小区。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to determine whether the first cell satisfies a first criterion, where the first criterion is at least one network identifier of the first cell and the candidate network Type correspondence; in the case that the first cell satisfies the first criterion, the communication device camps on the first cell.
第六方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括收发单元和处理单元：该处理单元用于根据第一判定结果确定候选网络类型包括NTN和/或TN，其中，该第一判定结果包括以下至少一种判定结果：该通信装置是否处于第一模式、该通信装置是否具备NTN接入能力、该通信装置是否被允许接入该NTN，该候选网络类型用于该通信装置选择服务网络，在该第一模式下该通信装置根据第一网络类型选择服务网络，该第一网络类型包括以下至少一个：该NTN、该TN；该收发单元用于向第一网络设备发送第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该候选网络类型，该第四指示信息用于该第一网络设备为该通信装置选择目标小区。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising a transceiver unit and a processing unit: the processing unit is configured to determine that the candidate network type includes NTN and/or TN according to a first determination result, wherein the first determination result includes at least one of the following: Judgment results: whether the communication device is in the first mode, whether the communication device has NTN access capability, whether the communication device is allowed to access the NTN, the candidate network type is used for the communication device to select a service network, in the first In one mode, the communication device selects a service network according to a first network type, and the first network type includes at least one of the following: the NTN, the TN; the transceiver unit is configured to send fourth indication information to the first network device, the fourth The indication information is used to indicate the candidate network type, and the fourth indication information is used for the first network device to select a target cell for the communication apparatus.
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元还用于接收来自该第一网络设备的配置信息，该配置信息包括该目标小区的信息，该目标小区的网络类型与该候选网络类型对应；该通信装置切换到该目标小区。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementations of the sixth aspect, the transceiver unit is further configured to receive configuration information from the first network device, where the configuration information includes information of the target cell, and the network type of the target cell is the same as that of the target cell. The candidate network type corresponds; the communication device switches to the target cell.
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，该第一模式的开启或关闭由用户设置。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementations of the sixth aspect, the first mode is turned on or off by a user.
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元还用于展示用于开启或关闭该第一模式的控件。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementations of the sixth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to display a control for enabling or disabling the first mode.
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些实现方式中，该第一模式的开启或关闭由网络设备指示。With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementations of the sixth aspect, the on or off of the first mode is instructed by the network device.
第七方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括收发单元和处理单元：该收发单元用于接收来自终端设备的第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备的候选网络类型，该终端设备的候选网络类型是NTN和/或TN；该处理单元用于根据该第四指示信息决策是否进行切换或释放该终端设备。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided, including a transceiver unit and a processing unit: the transceiver unit is configured to receive fourth indication information from a terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a candidate network type of the terminal device, the The candidate network type of the terminal device is NTN and/or TN; the processing unit is configured to decide whether to perform handover or release the terminal device according to the fourth indication information.
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元具体用于：若第一小区的网络类型与该候选网络类型不对应，则该确定进行切换或释放该终端设备。With reference to the seventh aspect, in some implementations of the seventh aspect, the processing unit is specifically configured to: if the network type of the first cell does not correspond to the candidate network type, determine to perform handover or release the terminal device.
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元还用于在确定释放该终端设备的情况下，向该终端设备发送RRC释放消息，该RRC释放消息中包括第五指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示第一小区的的网络类型。With reference to the seventh aspect, in some implementations of the seventh aspect, the transceiver unit is further configured to send an RRC release message to the terminal device when it is determined to release the terminal device, where the RRC release message includes a fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the first cell.
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元还用于根据该第四指示信息确定第二小区，该第二小区的网络类型与该候选网络类型对应；该收发单元还用于向该 第二小区所属的第二网络设备发送切换请求消息；该收发单元还用于接收来自该第二网络设备的切换确认消息或切换拒绝消息。With reference to the seventh aspect, in some implementations of the seventh aspect, the processing unit is further configured to determine a second cell according to the fourth indication information, where the network type of the second cell corresponds to the candidate network type; the transceiver unit It is also used for sending a handover request message to the second network device to which the second cell belongs; the transceiver unit is also used for receiving a handover confirmation message or a handover rejection message from the second network device.
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，该切换请求消息中包括该第四指示信息。With reference to the seventh aspect, in some implementations of the seventh aspect, the handover request message includes the fourth indication information.
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些实现方式中，该切换拒绝消息中包括第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于指示该第二小区的网络类型，该第二小区的网络类型是该NTN或该TN。With reference to the seventh aspect, in some implementations of the seventh aspect, the handover rejection message includes sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the second cell, the network type of the second cell is this NTN or this TN.
第八方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括收发单元和处理单元：该收发单元用于接收来自第一网络设备的切换请求消息，该切换请求消息中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示终端设备的候选网络类型，该终端设备的候选网络类型是NTN和/或TN；该处理单元用于根据该第四指示信息确定是否接受该终端设备切换到第二小区。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising a transceiver unit and a processing unit: the transceiver unit is configured to receive a handover request message from a first network device, the handover request message includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information Used to indicate the candidate network type of the terminal equipment, the candidate network type of the terminal equipment is NTN and/or TN; the processing unit is used to determine whether to accept the terminal equipment handover to the second cell according to the fourth indication information.
结合第八方面，在第八方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元具体用于：若该第二小区的网络类型与该候选网络类型对应，则确定允许该终端设备切换到该第二小区；该收发单元还用于向该第一网络设备发送切换确认消息，该切换确认消息用于指示该第二网络设备接受该终端设备切换到该第二小区。With reference to the eighth aspect, in some implementations of the eighth aspect, the processing unit is specifically configured to: if the network type of the second cell corresponds to the candidate network type, determine to allow the terminal device to switch to the second cell ; the transceiver unit is further configured to send a handover confirmation message to the first network device, where the handover confirmation message is used to instruct the second network device to accept the terminal device being handed over to the second cell.
结合第八方面，在第八方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元具体用于：该第二小区的网络类型与该候选网络类型不对应，则确定拒绝该终端设备切换到该第二小区；该收发单元还用于向该第一网络设备发送切换拒绝消息，该切换拒绝消息用于指示该第二网络设备拒绝该终端设备切换到该第二小区。With reference to the eighth aspect, in some implementations of the eighth aspect, the processing unit is specifically configured to: if the network type of the second cell does not correspond to the candidate network type, determine to reject the terminal device from switching to the second cell ; the transceiver unit is further configured to send a handover rejection message to the first network device, where the handover rejection message is used to instruct the second network device to reject the terminal device from handing over to the second cell.
结合第八方面，在第八方面的某些实现方式中，该切换拒绝消息中包括第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于指示该第二小区的网络类型，该第二小区的网络类型是该NTN或该TN。With reference to the eighth aspect, in some implementations of the eighth aspect, the handover rejection message includes sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the second cell, the network type of the second cell is this NTN or this TN.
第九方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合，可用于执行存储器中的指令，以实现上述第一方面和第二方面及第一方面和第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地，该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地，该通信装置还包括通信接口，处理器与通信接口耦合。In a ninth aspect, a communication apparatus is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the methods of the above-mentioned first and second aspects and any possible implementations of the first and second aspects. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中，该通信装置为终端设备。当该通信装置为终端设备时，该通信接口可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication apparatus is a terminal device. When the communication device is a terminal device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
在另一种实现方式中，该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片时，该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip configured in the terminal device. When the communication device is a chip configured in the terminal device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
可选地，该收发器可以为收发电路。可选地，该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第十方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合，可用于执行存储器中的指令，以实现上述第三方面及第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地，该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地，该通信装置还包括通信接口，处理器与通信接口耦合。In a tenth aspect, a communication apparatus is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory, so as to implement the method in the third aspect and any possible implementation manner of the third aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中，该通信装置为第一网络设备。当该通信装置为第一网络设备时，该通信接口可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication apparatus is a first network device. When the communication apparatus is the first network device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
在另一种实现方式中，该通信装置为配置于第一网络设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于第一网络设备中的芯片时，该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation manner, the communication apparatus is a chip configured in the first network device. When the communication device is a chip configured in the first network device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
可选地，该收发器可以为收发电路。可选地，该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第十一方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合，可用于执行存储器中的指令，以实现上述第四方面及第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地，该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地，该通信装置还包括通信接口，处理器与通信接口耦合。In an eleventh aspect, a communication apparatus is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory, so as to implement the method in the fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中，该通信装置为第二网络设备。当该通信装置为第二网络设备时，该通信接口可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication apparatus is a second network device. When the communication apparatus is the second network device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
在另一种实现方式中，该通信装置为配置于第二网络设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于第二网络设备中的芯片时，该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation manner, the communication apparatus is a chip configured in the second network device. When the communication device is a chip configured in the second network device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
可选地，该收发器可以为收发电路。可选地，该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第十二方面，提供了一种处理器，包括：输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路用于通过所述输入电路接收信号，并通过所述输出电路发射信号，使得所述处理器执行第一方面至第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。A twelfth aspect provides a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes the method in any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
在具体实现过程中，上述处理器可以为一个或多个芯片，输入电路可以为输入管脚，输出电路可以为输出管脚，处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的，输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的，且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路，该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the above-mentioned processor may be one or more chips, the input circuit may be input pins, the output circuit may be output pins, and the processing circuit may be transistors, gate circuits, flip-flops and various logic circuits, etc. . The input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by a transmitter, and the input circuit and output The circuit can be the same circuit that acts as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
第十三方面，提供了一种处理装置，包括处理器和存储器。该处理器用于读取存储器中存储的指令，并可通过接收器接收信号，通过发射器发射信号，以执行第一方面至第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。A thirteenth aspect provides a processing apparatus including a processor and a memory. The processor is configured to read the instructions stored in the memory, and can receive signals through the receiver and transmit signals through the transmitter, so as to execute the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
可选地，所述处理器为一个或多个，所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
可选地，所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起，或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be provided separately from the processor.
在具体实现过程中，存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器，例如只读存储器(read only memory，ROM)，其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上，也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上，本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the memory can be a non-transitory memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be separately set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the setting manner of the memory and the processor.
应理解，相关的数据交互过程例如发送指示信息可以为从处理器输出指示信息的过程，接收能力信息可以为处理器接收输入能力信息的过程。具体地，处理器输出的数据可以输出给发射器，处理器接收的输入数据可以来自接收器。其中，发射器和接收器可以统称为收发器。It should be understood that the relevant data interaction process, such as sending indication information, may be a process of outputting indication information from the processor, and receiving capability information may be a process of receiving input capability information by the processor. Specifically, the data output by the processor can be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor can be from the receiver. Among them, the transmitter and the receiver may be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
上述第十三方面中的处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。该处理装置中的处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现。当通过硬件实现时，该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等；当通过软件来实现时，该处理器可以是一个通用处理器，通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现，该存储器可以集成在处理器中，可以位于该处理器之外，独立存在。The processing device in the thirteenth aspect above may be one or more chips. The processor in the processing device may be implemented by hardware or by software. When implemented by hardware, the processor can be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processor can be a general-purpose processor, implemented by reading software codes stored in a memory, which can Integrated in the processor, can be located outside the processor, independent existence.
第十四方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当所述计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面至 第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。A fourteenth aspect provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising: a computer program (also referred to as code, or instructions), which, when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned first aspect to The method in any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect.
第十五方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)当其在计算机上运行时，使得上述第一方面至第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法被执行。A fifteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program (which may also be referred to as code, or instructions), when it is run on a computer, so that the above-mentioned first aspect to The method in any of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect is performed.
第十六方面，提供了一种通信***，包括前述的终端设备、第一网络设备和第二网络设备。In a sixteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, including the aforementioned terminal device, a first network device and a second network device.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1是本申请实施例提供的通信***的示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图2是适用于本申请实施例提供的方法的通信***的示意图。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the method provided by this embodiment of the present application.
图3示出了本申请实施例的空口控制面协议栈的示意图。FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of an air interface control plane protocol stack according to an embodiment of the present application.
图4示出了本申请实施例的一应用场景的示意图。FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
图5示出了本申请实施例的另一应用场景的示意图。FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
图6示出了本申请实施例的又一应用场景的示意图。FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of still another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
图7示出了本申请实施例的又一应用场景的示意图。FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of still another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
图8示出了终端设备在三种状态之间切换的示意图。FIG. 8 shows a schematic diagram of a terminal device switching between three states.
图9示出了基于Xn接口的切换的方法示意性流程图。FIG. 9 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for handover based on the Xn interface.
图10示出了本申请实施例提供的选择网络的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图11示出了本申请实施例提供的选择网络的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 11 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for selecting a network provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图12示出了本申请实施例提供的通信的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 12 shows a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图13和图14示出了本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 show schematic block diagrams of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图15是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图。FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图16是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信***，例如：长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)***、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)***、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)、第五代(5th generation，5G)***、新无线(new radio，NR)、非地面通信(non-terrestrial network，NTN)***(或者称为“卫星通信***”)以及未来的移动通信***等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example: long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex) , TDD), 5th generation (5G) systems, new radio (NR), non-terrestrial network (NTN) systems (or "satellite communication systems") and future mobile communication systems, etc.
本申请实施例中的终端可以指一种具有无线收发功能的设备，可以称为终端(terminal)、用户设备(user equipment，UE)、移动台(mobile station，MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)、车载终端、远方站、远程终端等。终端具体的形态可以是手机(mobile phone)、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)电话、可穿戴设备平板电脑(pad)、台式机、笔记本电脑、一体机、车载终端、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)等。终端可以应用于如下场景：虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)、工业控制(industrial control)、无人驾驶(self driving)、远程手术(remote medical  surgery)、智能电网(smart grid)、运输安全(transportation safety)、智慧城市(smart city)、智慧家庭(smart home)等。终端可以是固定的或者移动的。需要说明的是，终端可以支持至少一种无线通信技术，例如LTE、NR、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)等。The terminal in this embodiment of the present application may refer to a device with a wireless transceiver function, which may be referred to as a terminal (terminal), user equipment (UE), mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), vehicle terminal, remote station, remote terminal, etc. The specific form of the terminal can be a mobile phone, a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wearable device tablet computer (pad), a desktop computer, a notebook computer, an all-in-one computer, and a vehicle-mounted terminal. , wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA) and so on. The terminal can be applied to the following scenarios: virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR), industrial control (industrial control), unmanned driving (self driving), remote surgery (remote medical surgery), smart grid (smart grid), transportation safety (transportation safety), smart city (smart city), smart home (smart home), etc. Terminals can be fixed or mobile. It should be noted that the terminal may support at least one wireless communication technology, such as LTE, NR, wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), and the like.
本申请实施例中的接入网设备可以是一种为终端提供无线通信功能的设备，也可称之为无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)设备等。接入网设备包括但不限于：5G中的下一代基站(next generation nodeB，gNB)、演进型节点B(evolved node B，eNB)、基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)、收发点(transmitting and receiving point，TRP)、发射点(transmitting point，TP)、中继站、接入点等。接入网设备还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器、集中单元(centralized unit，CU)、分布单元(distributed unit，DU)等。其中，接入网设备可以支持至少一种无线通信技术，例如LTE、NR、WCDMA等。The access network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device that provides a wireless communication function for a terminal, and may also be referred to as a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) device or the like. Access network equipment includes but is not limited to: next generation node B (gNB), evolved node B (evolved node B, eNB), baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), transmitting and receiving point (transmitting and receiving) in 5G point, TRP), transmitting point (TP), relay station, access point, etc. The access network device may also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU), a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU), etc. in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario. The access network device may support at least one wireless communication technology, such as LTE, NR, WCDMA, and the like.
在一些部署中，本申请实施例中所涉及到的接入网设备可以是RAN中的基站(如gNB)等。基站可以是CU和DU的分离架构。例如，如图1所示。RAN可以与核心网相连(例如可以是长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)的核心网，也可以是5G的核心网等)。CU和DU可以理解为是对基站从逻辑功能角度的划分。CU和DU在物理上可以是分离的也可以部署在一起。多个DU可以共用一个CU。一个DU也可以连接多个CU(图中未示出)。CU和DU之间可以通过接口相连，例如可以是F1接口。CU和DU可以根据无线网络的协议层划分。In some deployments, the access network device involved in the embodiments of this application may be a base station (eg, a gNB) in the RAN, or the like. The base station may be a separate architecture of CU and DU. For example, as shown in Figure 1. The RAN may be connected to the core network (for example, it may be a long term evolution (LTE) core network, or a 5G core network, etc.). CU and DU can be understood as the division of the base station from the perspective of logical functions. CUs and DUs can be physically separate or deployed together. Multiple DUs can share one CU. One DU can also be connected to multiple CUs (not shown in the figure). The CU and the DU can be connected through an interface, such as an F1 interface. CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network.
例如，一种可能的划分方式是：CU用于执行无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)层、业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol，SDAP)层以及分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层的功能，而DU用于执行无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层，媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)层，物理(physical)层等的功能。For example, a possible division method is: the CU is used to execute a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) layer, a service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) layer, and a packet data convergence layer protocol (packet data convergence layer protocol). Protocol, PDCP) layer function, and DU is used to perform radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer, physical (physical) layer and other functions.
可选地，gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit，AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能，DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如，CU负责处理非实时协议和服务，实现无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)，分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务，实现无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)层和物理(physical，PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息，或者，由PHY层的信息转变而来，因而，在这种架构下，高层信令，如RRC层信令，也可以认为是由DU发送的，或者，由DU和AAU发送的。可以理解的是，接入网设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外，可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network，RAN)中的接入网设备，也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network，CN)中的接入网设备，本申请对此不做限定。Optionally, the gNB may further include an active antenna unit (active antenna unit, AAU). The CU implements some functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some functions of the gNB. For example, the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implementing functions of radio resource control (RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layers. The DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implementing the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, the media access control (MAC) layer and the physical (PHY) layer. AAU implements some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, therefore, in this architecture, the higher-layer signaling, such as the RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU. , or, sent by DU and AAU. It can be understood that the access network device may be a device including one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node. In addition, the CU can be divided into access network equipment in the access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into the access network equipment in the core network (core network, CN), this application does not Do limit.
可以理解的是，对CU和DU处理功能按照这种协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例，也可以按照其他的方式进行划分。例如可以将CU或者DU划分为具有更多协议层的功能。例如，CU或DU还可以划分为具有协议层的部分处理功能。It can be understood that the division of CU and DU processing functions according to this protocol layer is only an example, and may also be divided in other ways. For example, a CU or DU may be divided into functions with more protocol layers. For example, a CU or DU can also be divided into partial processing functions with a protocol layer.
在一种设计中，将RLC层的部分功能和RLC层以上的协议层的功能设置在CU，将RLC层的剩余功能和RLC层以下的协议层的功能设置在DU。In one design, some functions of the RLC layer and functions of the protocol layers above the RLC layer are placed in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layers below the RLC layer are placed in the DU.
在另一种设计中，还可以按照业务类型或者其他***需求对CU或者DU的功能进行划分。例如按时延划分，将处理时间需要满足时延要求的功能设置在DU，不需要满足该时延要求的功能设置在CU。In another design, the functions of the CU or DU may also be divided according to service types or other system requirements. For example, according to the delay, the functions whose processing time needs to meet the delay requirements are set in the DU, and the functions that do not need to meet the delay requirements are set in the CU.
在另一种设计中，CU也可以具有核心网的一个或多个功能。一个或者多个CU可以集中设置，也分离设置。例如CU可以设置在网络侧方便集中管理。DU可以具有多个射频功能，也可以将射频功能拉远设置。CU的功能可以由一个实体来实现也可以由不同的实体实现。例如，可以对CU的功能进行进一步切分，例如，将控制面(control panel，CP)和用户面(user panel，UP)分离，即CU的控制面(CU-CP)和CU用户面(CU-UP)。例如，CU-CP和CU-UP可以由不同的功能实体来实现，所述CU-CP和CU-UP可以与DU相耦合，共同完成基站的功能。In another design, the CU may also have one or more functions of the core network. One or more CUs can be set centrally or separately. For example, the CU can be set on the network side to facilitate centralized management. The DU can have multiple radio functions, or the radio functions can be set farther away. The functions of the CU can be implemented by one entity or by different entities. For example, the functions of the CU can be further segmented, for example, the control plane (CP) and the user plane (UP) can be separated, that is, the CU control plane (CU-CP) and the CU user plane (CU -UP). For example, the CU-CP and the CU-UP may be implemented by different functional entities, and the CU-CP and the CU-UP may be coupled with the DU to jointly complete the functions of the base station.
在本申请实施例中，终端或接入网设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作***层，以及运行在操作***层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit，MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作***可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作***，例如，Linux操作***、Unix操作***、Android操作***、iOS操作***或windows操作***等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且，本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定，只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序，以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可，例如，本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端或接入网设备，或者，是终端或接入网设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。In this embodiment of the present application, a terminal or an access network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer. This hardware layer includes hardware such as central processing unit (CPU), memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also called main memory). The operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system. The application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software. In addition, the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application can be executed to provide the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application. For example, the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal or an access network device, or a functional module in the terminal or access network device that can call and execute a program.
另外，本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。例如，计算机可读介质可以包括，但不限于：磁存储器件(例如，硬盘、软盘或磁带等)，光盘(例如，压缩盘(compact disc，CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc，DVD)等)，智能卡和闪存器件(例如，可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory，EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外，本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于，无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。Additionally, various aspects or features of the present application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and/or engineering techniques. For example, computer readable media may include, but are not limited to, magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs) etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), card, stick or key drives, etc.). Additionally, various storage media described herein can represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
可以理解的是，接入网设备和终端可以部署在陆地上，包括室内或室外、手持或车载；也可以部署在水面上；还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和卫星上。本申请的实施例对无线接入网设备和终端的应用场景不做限定。It is understandable that the access network equipment and terminals can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on water; they can also be deployed on aircraft, balloons and satellites in the air. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the application scenarios of wireless access network devices and terminals.
图2是本申请的一个通信***的示意图。图2中的通信***可以包括至少一个终端(例如终端10、终端20、终端30、终端40、终端50和终端60)和接入网设备70。接入网设备70用于为终端提供通信服务并接入核心网，终端可以通过搜索接入网设备70发送的同步信号、广播信号等接入网络，从而进行与网络的通信。图2中的终端10、终端20、终端30、终端40和终端60可以与接入网设备70进行上下行传输。例如，接入网设备70可以向终端10、终端20、终端30、终端40和终端60发送下行信号，也可以接收终端10、终端20、终端30、终端40和终端60发送的上行信号。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a communication system of the present application. The communication system in FIG. 2 may include at least one terminal (eg, terminal 10 , terminal 20 , terminal 30 , terminal 40 , terminal 50 and terminal 60 ) and access network equipment 70 . The access network device 70 is used to provide communication services for the terminal and access the core network, and the terminal can access the network by searching for synchronization signals, broadcast signals, etc. sent by the access network device 70, so as to communicate with the network. The terminal 10 , the terminal 20 , the terminal 30 , the terminal 40 and the terminal 60 in FIG. 2 can perform uplink and downlink transmission with the access network device 70 . For example, the access network device 70 can send downlink signals to terminal 10 , terminal 20 , terminal 30 , terminal 40 and terminal 60 , and can also receive uplink signals sent by terminal 10 , terminal 20 , terminal 30 , terminal 40 and terminal 60 .
此外，终端40、终端50和终端60也可以看作一个通信***，终端60可以向终端40和终端50发送信号，也可以接收终端40和终端50发送的信号。也就是说，本申请的实施例可以适用于下行信号传输，也可以适用于上行信号传输，还可以适用于设备到设备(device to device，D2D)的信号传输。对于下行信号传输，发送设备是接入网设备，对应的接收设备是终端。对于上行信号传输，发送设备是终端，对应的接收设备是接入网设备。对于D2D的信号传输，发送设备是终端，对应的接收设备也是终端。本申请的实施例对信号的传输方向不做限定。In addition, the terminal 40 , the terminal 50 and the terminal 60 can also be regarded as a communication system, and the terminal 60 can send signals to the terminal 40 and the terminal 50 , and can also receive the signals sent by the terminal 40 and the terminal 50 . That is to say, the embodiments of the present application can be applied to downlink signal transmission, uplink signal transmission, and device to device (device to device, D2D) signal transmission. For downlink signal transmission, the sending device is an access network device, and the corresponding receiving device is a terminal. For uplink signal transmission, the sending device is a terminal, and the corresponding receiving device is an access network device. For D2D signal transmission, the sending device is a terminal, and the corresponding receiving device is also a terminal. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the transmission direction of the signal.
需要说明的是，本申请实施例可以应用于包括一个或多个接入网设备的通信***中，也可以应用于包括一个或多个终端的通信***中，本申请对此不进行限定。其中一个接入网设备可以向一个或多个终端发送数据或控制信令。多个接入网设备也可以同时向一个或多个终端发送数据或控制信令。It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a communication system including one or more access network devices, and may also be applied to a communication system including one or more terminals, which is not limited in this application. One of the access network devices may send data or control signaling to one or more terminals. Multiple access network devices can also send data or control signaling to one or more terminals at the same time.
图3示出了本申请实施例的空口控制面协议栈的示意图。在LTE和NR中，终端和接入网设备，或者终端和接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function，AMF)通过空口进行通信。为了更好地对数据进行处理，网络协议定义了若干协议栈，每个栈的功能各不相同。该空口控制面协议栈包括非接入层(non-access stratum，NAS)和接入层(access stratum,AS)。FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of an air interface control plane protocol stack according to an embodiment of the present application. In LTE and NR, terminals and access network equipment, or terminals and access and mobility management functions (access and mobility management functions, AMF) communicate over the air interface. In order to process the data better, the network protocol defines several protocol stacks, and the functions of each stack are different. The air interface control plane protocol stack includes a non-access stratum (non-access stratum, NAS) and an access stratum (access stratum, AS).
其中，NAS是终端和AMF之间的信令通道。具体地，UE向接入网设备发送信令，接入网设备将信令透传给AMF。其中，接入网设备在透传的过程中不进行数据解析，不知道其中的内容。NAS主要负责一些管理功能，如公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)选择，手动选择，接入控制，注册或签约信息等，且具体的过程需要和其他的协议层协同进行。Among them, the NAS is the signaling channel between the terminal and the AMF. Specifically, the UE sends signaling to the access network device, and the access network device transparently transmits the signaling to the AMF. Among them, the access network equipment does not perform data analysis during the transparent transmission process, and does not know the content therein. NAS is mainly responsible for some management functions, such as public land mobile network (PLMN) selection, manual selection, access control, registration or subscription information, etc., and the specific process needs to be coordinated with other protocol layers.
其中，AS是指除NAS之外的协议层。例如，如图3所示，AS包括无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)层，分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层，无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层，媒体访问控制(media access control，MAC)层和物理(physical，PHY)层。AS主要负责切换，加密，数据重传，排序或发送等功能。Among them, AS refers to a protocol layer other than NAS. For example, as shown in Figure 3, the AS includes a radio resource control (RRC) layer, a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, a radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, a media Access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical (physical, PHY) layer. AS is mainly responsible for switching, encryption, data retransmission, sorting or sending and other functions.
可以理解的是，NAS像头脑，用于做决策。AS像四肢，用于具体做事。Understandably, NAS is like a mind, used to make decisions. AS is like limbs, used to do specific things.
图4示出了本申请实施例的一种应用场景的示意图。该场景可以称为“透明卫星架构(RAN architecture with transparent satellite)”。该场景中，卫星主要是作为L1中继(relay)，即将物理层信号重新生成，对高层不可见。FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application. This scenario can be called "RAN architecture with transparent satellite". In this scenario, the satellite is mainly used as an L1 relay (relay), that is, the physical layer signal is regenerated, which is invisible to the upper layer.
图5示出了本申请实施例的另一种应用场景的示意图。该场景为没有卫星间链路(inter-satellite link，ISL)的再生卫星(regenerative satellite without ISL)，基站来处理有效载荷(gNB processed payload)。这个场景中，卫星作为基站。FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application. This scenario is a regenerative satellite without ISL (inter-satellite link, ISL), and the base station handles the payload (gNB processed payload). In this scenario, the satellite acts as the base station.
图6示出了本申请实施例的又一种应用场景的示意图。该场景为存在ISL的再生卫星，基站来处理有效载荷。这个场景中，卫星也是作为基站。FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of still another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application. This scenario is a regenerating satellite with an ISL, and the base station handles the payload. In this scenario, the satellite is also used as a base station.
图7示出了本申请实施例的又一种应用场景的示意图。该场景中卫星是DU(NG-RAN with a regenerative satellite based on gNB-DU)。FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of still another application scenario of an embodiment of the present application. The satellite in this scenario is DU (NG-RAN with a regenerative satellite based on gNB-DU).
可以理解的是，本申请实施例还可以应用于卫星作为接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul，IAB)的场景中。It can be understood that the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to a scenario where satellites are used as integrated access and backhaul (IAB).
下面对本申请涉及到的术语进行简单介绍。The following briefly introduces the terms involved in this application.
1、RRC状态：1. RRC status:
在NR中，终端的RRC状态包括连接态(RRC_CONNECTED)，去激活态(RRC_INACTIVE)和空闲态(RRC_IDLE)。In NR, the RRC state of the terminal includes a connected state (RRC_CONNECTED), a deactivated state (RRC_INACTIVE) and an idle state (RRC_IDLE).
其中，终端处于RRC_CONNECTED表示终端与接入网设备以及核心网设备都已建立链路。当有数据到达网络时可以直接传送到终端。Wherein, that the terminal is in RRC_CONNECTED indicates that the terminal has established links with the access network equipment and the core network equipment. When data arrives on the network, it can be sent directly to the terminal.
其中，终端处于RRC_INACTIVE表示终端之前与接入网设备以及核心网设备建立过链路，但是终端到接入网设备这一段链路被释放了。虽然终端到接入网设备之间的链路被释放了，但是接入网设备会存储终端的上下文，当有数据需要传输时，接入网设备可以快速恢复这段链路。Wherein, that the terminal is in RRC_INACTIVE indicates that the terminal has established a link with the access network device and the core network device before, but the link from the terminal to the access network device is released. Although the link between the terminal and the access network device is released, the access network device will store the context of the terminal, and when there is data to be transmitted, the access network device can quickly restore the link.
其中，终端处于RRC_IDLE表示终端与接入网设备之间没有链路。当有数据需要传输时，需要建立终端到接入网设备，以及到核心网设备之间的链路。Wherein, that the terminal is in RRC_IDLE indicates that there is no link between the terminal and the access network device. When there is data to be transmitted, it is necessary to establish a link between the terminal to the access network equipment and to the core network equipment.
此外，RRC_CONNECTED，RRC_INACTIVE和RRC_IDLE三者之间的转换如图8所示。In addition, the transitions between RRC_CONNECTED, RRC_INACTIVE and RRC_IDLE are shown in Figure 8.
可以理解的是，RRC_INACTIVE也可以称为“第三态”。It can be understood that RRC_INACTIVE can also be called a "third state".
2、PLMN选择：2. PLMN selection:
PLMN是由政府或政府所批准的经营者为公众提供陆地移动通信业务的目的而建立和经营的网络。PLMN标识(identity，ID)由移动国家号码(mobile contrary code，MCC)和移动网号(mobile net code，MNC)组成。其中，MCC唯一表示移动用户的所属国家，例如，中国的MCC为460。MNC唯一表示对应国家中的网络，例如，***全球移动通信***(global system for mobile communications，GSM)网为00，***GSM网为01。终端在某些情况下(如开机后)，需要选择一个网络，选网的过程则为PLMN选择。简单来说，终端的AS会在NAS的要求下或者自动(例如，根据PLMN优先级顺序自动)去读取能测量到信号的小区***消息中广播的PLMN ID列表。然后，AS把这些PLMN ID列表报告给NAS，NAS在PLMN ID列表中选择一个PLMN ID作为终端所选择的PLMN。A PLMN is a network established and operated by the government or a government-approved operator for the purpose of providing land mobile communication services to the public. The PLMN identity (identity, ID) is composed of a mobile country code (mobile contrary code, MCC) and a mobile network number (mobile net code, MNC). Among them, the MCC uniquely represents the country to which the mobile user belongs. For example, the MCC in China is 460. MNC uniquely represents the network in the corresponding country, for example, China Mobile's global system for mobile communications (GSM) network is 00, and China Unicom's GSM network is 01. The terminal needs to select a network in some cases (such as after starting up), and the process of network selection is PLMN selection. Simply put, the AS of the terminal will read the PLMN ID list broadcast in the system message of the cell where the signal can be measured, or automatically (for example, automatically according to the PLMN priority order) at the request of the NAS. Then, the AS reports these PLMN ID lists to the NAS, and the NAS selects a PLMN ID in the PLMN ID list as the PLMN selected by the terminal.
具体地，PLMN选择的方法的示意性流程如下所述：Specifically, the schematic flow of the method for PLMN selection is as follows:
(1)AS在NAS要求或者自动地根据自己能力扫描所有NR带宽(band)的链路信道(RF channels)以发现可用的PLMN。终端会找到每个频点中参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power，RSRP)最好的小区然后读***消息块(system information block，SIB)1得到PLMN ID。(1) AS is required by NAS or automatically scans all link channels (RF channels) of NR bandwidth (band) according to its own capability to find available PLMNs. The terminal will find the cell with the best reference signal receiving power (RSRP) in each frequency point, and then read the system information block (SIB) 1 to obtain the PLMN ID.
(2)AS向NAS发送报告，该报告包括上述每个小区中RSRP最好的PLMN ID。其中，对于RSRP小于-110dBm的小区，该报告还包括该小区的RSRP。对于RSRP大于-110dBm的小区，该报告可以不包括该小区的RSRP。(2) AS sends a report to the NAS, the report includes the PLMN ID with the best RSRP in each cell above. Wherein, for a cell whose RSRP is less than -110 dBm, the report also includes the RSRP of the cell. For cells with RSRP greater than -110dBm, the report may not include the RSRP of the cell.
可以理解的是，PLMN的选择可以是在NAS的要求下停止，也可以是AS根据一些存储下来的历史信息(例如，频点信息或之前收到的测量配置信息)进行优化。It can be understood that the selection of the PLMN can be stopped at the request of the NAS, or the AS can perform optimization according to some stored historical information (for example, frequency point information or previously received measurement configuration information).
还可以理解的是，不同的PLMN具有不同的优先级，例如，终端开机后搜索PLMN的优先级如下所示：It can also be understood that different PLMNs have different priorities. For example, the priority of searching for PLMNs after the terminal is powered on is as follows:
a.注册PLMN(registered PLMN，RPLMN)，关机前终端注册的PLMN，终端会记录下来。a. Registered PLMN (registered PLMN, RPLMN), the terminal will record the PLMN registered by the terminal before shutdown.
b.等效PLMN列表(equivalent PLMN list，EPLMN)，终端执行小区选择和重选、切换时同等对待的PLMN list。此外，该EPLMN由NAS提供。b. Equivalent PLMN list (equivalent PLMN list, EPLMN), the PLMN list that is treated equally when the terminal performs cell selection, reselection, and handover. Furthermore, this EPLMN is provided by NAS.
c.归属PLMN(home PLMN，HPLMN)，为终端用户归属的PLMN。也就是说，终端用户识别单元(subscriber identity module，SIM)卡上的国际移动用户识别吗(international mobile subscriber identity，IMSI)号中包含的MCC和MNC与HPLMN上的MCC和MNC是一致的，对于终端SIM卡来说，其归属的PLMN只有一个。c. Home PLMN (home PLMN, HPLMN), which is the PLMN to which the end user belongs. That is to say, the MCC and MNC contained in the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) number on the subscriber identity module (SIM) card of the terminal are consistent with the MCC and MNC on the HPLMN. For the terminal SIM card, there is only one PLMN to which it belongs.
d.等效归属PLMN列表(equivalent HPLMN List，EHPLMN)，与HPLMN同等对待的PLMN list。d. Equivalent HPLMN List (EHPLMN List, EHPLMN), a PLMN list that is treated the same as HPLMN.
(3)NAS在收到AS上报的PLMN list后，选择其中一个作为终端使用的PLMN。其中，选择PLMN可以是NAS自动选择，也可以是手动选择。(3) After receiving the PLMN list reported by the AS, the NAS selects one of them as the PLMN used by the terminal. The selection of the PLMN may be automatically selected by the NAS, or may be manually selected.
可以理解的是，自动即是终端自动完成，不涉及人机交互。而手动则是NAS把PLMN ID上传到更高层(例如，应用层)，由用户手动进行选择。例如，终端开机后，界面会显示***、***等字样让用户进行选择。It can be understood that automatic means that the terminal is automatically completed, and does not involve human-computer interaction. Manually, the NAS uploads the PLMN ID to a higher layer (eg, the application layer), and the user manually selects it. For example, after the terminal is turned on, the interface will display the words China Unicom, China Mobile, etc. for the user to choose.
(4)在选定了PLMN后，NAS会根据选定的PLMN给AS提供EPLMN list和被禁止的跟踪区域(tracking area，TA)让AS用于小区选择和重选。(4) After the PLMN is selected, the NAS will provide the AS with the EPLMN list and the forbidden tracking area (TA) according to the selected PLMN for the AS to use for cell selection and reselection.
3、小区选择：3. Community selection:
当终端开机或发生无线链路失败的情况时，在完成PLMN选择后，UE将执行小区搜索过程，并尽快选择合适的小区驻留，这个过程可以称为“小区选择”。终端根据以下条件评估该小区是否是合适的小区。一旦终端找到合适的小区，则小区选择过程就完成了。如果选择的小区不是合适的小区，则终端继续进行搜索，直到找到合适的小区并驻留。When the terminal is powered on or the radio link fails, after completing the PLMN selection, the UE will perform a cell search process and select a suitable cell to camp on as soon as possible. This process can be called "cell selection". The terminal evaluates whether the cell is a suitable cell according to the following conditions. Once the terminal finds a suitable cell, the cell selection process is complete. If the selected cell is not a suitable cell, the terminal continues to search until a suitable cell is found and camped on.
根据第三代合作伙伴项目(3 rd generation partner project，3GPP)技术规范(technical specification，TS)38.304协议，终端可能驻留的小区也可以称为合适小区(suitable cell)，合适小区需要具备以下条件： According to the technical specification (TS) 38.304 protocol of the 3rd generation partner project (3GPP), the cell where the terminal may reside can also be called a suitable cell, and a suitable cell needs to meet the following conditions :
(1)终端所选小区的PLMN ID属于RPLMN或EPLMN列表。(1) The PLMN ID of the cell selected by the terminal belongs to the RPLMN or EPLMN list.
(2)终端通过读取小区广播里的各种参数，来计算所选小区是否满足S准则。(2) The terminal calculates whether the selected cell satisfies the S criterion by reading various parameters in the cell broadcast.
具体地，若小区的S值(即Srxlev和Squal)大于0，则该小区是合适的小区(或者说，适合驻留的小区)。Srxlev和Squal的计算方式如下：Specifically, if the S value of the cell (ie, Srxlev and Squal) is greater than 0, the cell is a suitable cell (or, in other words, a cell suitable for camping on). Srxlev and Squal are calculated as follows:
Srxlev＝Q rxlevmeas-(Q rxlevmin+Q rxlevminoffset)-P compensation-Qoffset temp， Srxlev=Q rxlevmeas -(Q rxlevmin +Q rxlevminoffset )-P compensation -Qoffset temp ,
Squal＝Q qualmeas-(Q qualmin+Q qualminoffset)-Qoffset temp Squal=Q qualmeas -(Q qualmin +Q qualminoffset )-Qoffset temp
其中，Srxlev是指小区选择/重选过程中计算得到的电平值(dB)；Q rxlevmin是指该小区需要的最小接收信号强度值，该值在SIB1的q-RxLevMin中指示(dBm)；P compensation为max(PEMAX-PUMAX，0)(dB)，其中PEMAX为终端在接入该小区时，***设定的最大允许发送功率，PUMAX是指根据终端等级规定的最大输出功率；Q rxlevminOffset是指小区最低接收电平偏置，仅当终端驻留在VPLMN且由于周期性搜索一个高优先级的PLMN而触发小区选择评估时，才使用该参数，该参数可以对Qrxlevmin进行一定的偏置；Qoffset temp为临时偏移值。 Among them, Srxlev refers to the level value (dB) calculated in the cell selection/reselection process; Q rxlevmin refers to the minimum received signal strength value required by the cell, which is indicated in q-RxLevMin of SIB1 (dBm); P compensation is max(PEMAX-PUMAX, 0)(dB), where PEMAX is the maximum allowable transmit power set by the system when the terminal accesses the cell, PUMAX is the maximum output power specified according to the terminal level; Q rxlevminOffset is Refers to the cell's minimum reception level bias. This parameter is only used when the terminal resides in the VPLMN and the cell selection evaluation is triggered due to the periodic search for a high-priority PLMN. This parameter can bias the Qrxlevmin to a certain extent; Qoffset temp is a temporary offset value.
Squal是指小区选择/重选过程中得到的接收信号质量；Q qualmeas为测量的小区的参考信号接收质量；Q qualmin为小区的最小需求参考信号接收质量；Q qualminoffset为相对于Q qualmin的偏移值。 Squal refers to the received signal quality obtained during the cell selection/reselection process; Q qualmeas is the measured reference signal received quality of the cell; Q qualmin is the minimum required reference signal received quality of the cell; Q qualminoffset is the offset relative to Q qualmin value.
(3)终端所选小区没有禁止终端接入。(3) The cell selected by the terminal does not prohibit the terminal from accessing.
(4)终端所选小区的至少一个跟踪区代码(tracking area code，TAC)不在被禁的TA里。(4) At least one tracking area code (tracking area code, TAC) of the cell selected by the terminal is not in the prohibited TA.
4、小区重选：4. Community reselection:
当IDLE态的终端驻留在一个小区后，随着终端的移动，终端可能需要更换到另一个更高优先级或更好信号的小区驻留，这个过程可以称为“小区重选过程”。小区选择是尽快找到一个合适小区的过程，小区重选是选择更适合小区的过程。重选过程中，终端会根据RRC释放消息和驻留小区的广播消息中的频点和优先级对邻区进行测量，终端会在一些事件(例如，RRC状态改变、相关的定时器超时、发生了PLMN选择或再次收到RRC释放消息)之后删除这些优先级。When a terminal in IDLE state camps on a cell, as the terminal moves, the terminal may need to switch to another cell with a higher priority or better signal to camp on. This process can be called a "cell reselection process". Cell selection is the process of finding a suitable cell as soon as possible, and cell reselection is the process of selecting a more suitable cell. During the reselection process, the terminal will measure the neighboring cells according to the frequency and priority in the RRC release message and the broadcast message of the camped cell. These priorities are deleted after PLMN selection or RRC release message is received again).
需要说明的是，小区重选后的小区也要符合上述提到的合适小区的条件。除此之外，还要满足执行测量准则和重选准则。It should be noted that, the cell after cell reselection also meets the above-mentioned conditions of a suitable cell. In addition, the execution measurement criteria and reselection criteria must be met.
(1)执行测量准则，用于终端根据这些条件决定是否开始对该小区进行测量。其中执行测量准则包括：(1) Execute measurement criteria, for the terminal to decide whether to start measuring the cell according to these conditions. Among them, the implementation measurement criteria include:
a.对于优先级高于本服务小区的频率层或***，终端始终进行测量；a. For the frequency layer or system with a higher priority than the serving cell, the terminal always measures;
b.如果服务小区的Srxlev<＝Sintrasearch，终端启动对同频小区的测量，Sintrasearch为小区重选的同频测量触发门限；b. If Srxlev<=Sintrasearch of the serving cell, the terminal starts the measurement of the intra-frequency cell, and Sintrasearch is the trigger threshold for intra-frequency measurement of cell reselection;
c.如果服务小区的Srxlev<＝Snonintrasearch或Snonintrasearch未配置，终端启动对同优先级频率或低优先级频率及***的测量，Snonintrasearch为小区重选的异频测量启动门限。c. If Srxlev<=Snonintrasearch or Snonintrasearch of the serving cell is not configured, the terminal starts the measurement of the same priority frequency or low priority frequency and system, and Snonintrasearch is the threshold for inter-frequency measurement start of cell reselection.
(2)重选准则，用于终端在测量后判断是否执行小区重选到新的小区。其中重选准则包括：(2) A reselection criterion, which is used by the terminal to determine whether to perform cell reselection to a new cell after measurement. The re-selection criteria include:
a.高优先级频率或***的重选标准：目标频率小区的Srxlev>Threshx,high且持续TreselectionRAT时间，Threshx,high为小区重选至高优先级小区的重选判决门限，其值越大则重选至高优先频率的小区越容易，TreselectionRAT为小区重选的定时器时长，用于避免乒乓效应；a. High-priority frequency or system reselection criteria: Srxlev>Threshx,high of the target frequency cell for TreselectionRAT time, Threshx,high is the reselection decision threshold for cell reselection to high-priority cell. The easier it is to select a cell with a high priority frequency, TreselectionRAT is the timer duration for cell reselection, which is used to avoid the ping-pong effect;
b.低优先级频率或***的重选标准：服务小区的Srxlev<Threshserving,low，且目标频率小区的Srxlev>Threshx,low且持续TreselectionRAT时间，Threshserving,low为小区满足选择或重选条件的最小接收功率级别值，Threshx,low为小区重选至低优先级小区的重选判决门限，其值越小则重选至低优先级小区越困难；b. Re-selection criteria for low-priority frequencies or systems: Srxlev<Threshserving,low of the serving cell, and Srxlev>Threshx,low of the target frequency cell for TreselectionRAT time, Threshserving,low is the smallest cell that satisfies the selection or reselection conditions Received power level value, Threshx, low is the reselection decision threshold for cell reselection to a low-priority cell, and the smaller the value, the more difficult it is to reselect to a low-priority cell;
c.同优先级频率或***的重选标准：小区重选到同优先级频率中小区基于同频小区重选的排序(ranking)标准。其中，同频小区重选标准(ranking)定义如下，R s为当前服务小区的ranking值，R n为邻小区的ranking值 c. Same-priority frequency or system reselection criteria: cells reselection to the same-priority frequencies are based on the ranking criteria for intra-frequency cell reselection. Among them, the same-frequency cell reselection criterion (ranking) is defined as follows, R s is the ranking value of the current serving cell, and R n is the ranking value of the neighboring cell
R s＝Q meas,s+Q hyst-Qoffset temp R s =Q meas,s +Q hyst -Qoffset temp
R n＝Q meas,n-Q offset-Qoffset temp R n =Q meas,n -Q offset -Qoffset temp
其中，Q hyst为迟滞值，用于防止乒乓重选，Qmeas为终端测量得到的小区的接收信强度值，Qoffset对于同频的取值为Qoffsets,n，对于异频的取值为Qoffsets,n+Qoffsetfrequency。 Among them, Q hyst is the hysteresis value, which is used to prevent ping-pong reselection, Qmeas is the received signal strength value of the cell measured by the terminal, Qoffset is Qoffsets,n for the same frequency, and Qoffsets,n for the different frequency +Qoffsetfrequency.
d.终端会对所有满足小区选择S标准的小区进行ranking值的排序。重选时不是简单 重选到排序最好的小区，而是找出排序时的最高ranking值，与该最高ranking值相差一定范围内(例如，xdB，x是预配的)的小区都认为是相近小区，在这些相近小区中，终端重选到拥有较高波束质量的波束数量最多的小区。d. The terminal will sort the ranking values of all cells that meet the cell selection S criterion. The reselection is not simply to reselect the cell with the best ranking, but to find the highest ranking value in the ranking, and the cells that are within a certain range (for example, xdB, x is pre-assigned) from the highest ranking value are considered as Close cells, among these close cells, the terminal reselects to the cell with the largest number of beams with higher beam quality.
可以理解的是，在当前驻留的小区的***消息中会广播当前驻留小区和邻区的配置参数，从而使得终端能够计算得到R s和R n等参数。例如，终端测量小区得到小区的接收信号强度值Qmeas。具体地，每个小区的信号强度高于门限的至多N个波束(beam)会被用来生成小区量(cell quality)，小区量经过层3过滤后作为Qmeas。其中，门限和N在广播消息中通知终端。此外，高于门限的波束(beam)可以被认为是较高波束质量的波束(good beam)。 It can be understood that the configuration parameters of the currently camped cell and neighboring cells will be broadcast in the system message of the currently camped cell, so that the terminal can calculate parameters such as R s and R n . For example, the terminal measures the cell to obtain the received signal strength value Qmeas of the cell. Specifically, at most N beams (beams) whose signal strengths of each cell are higher than a threshold are used to generate a cell quality, which is filtered by layer 3 as Qmeas. Among them, the threshold and N are notified to the terminal in the broadcast message. Furthermore, beams above the threshold can be considered as good beams with higher beam quality.
还可以理解的是，对于高/低优先级频率或***，有多个小区满足条件时，也要对该多个小区进行ranking。It can also be understood that, for high/low priority frequencies or systems, when there are multiple cells that meet the conditions, the multiple cells should also be ranked.
5、切换(handover)：5. Handover:
在移动通信***中，传统的切换流程中，连接态终端(例如，连接态UE)的移动性管理是由接入网设备控制的，即接入网设备通过发送切换消息指示终端切换到哪个小区以及如何进行切换。图9示出了基于Xn接口的切换流程的示意图。In a mobile communication system, in a traditional handover process, the mobility management of a terminal in a connected state (for example, a connected state UE) is controlled by an access network device, that is, the access network device instructs the terminal to switch to which cell by sending a handover message and how to switch. FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a handover flow based on the Xn interface.
S910，源基站向连接态UE发送RRC重配置消息。S910, the source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the connected UE.
该RRC重配置消息中包括测量对象、测量报告配置、测量标识等参数。The RRC reconfiguration message includes parameters such as measurement objects, measurement report configurations, and measurement identifiers.
S920，UE向源基站发送测量报告。S920, the UE sends a measurement report to the source base station.
UE根据RRC重配置消息对一系列小区进行测量后，形成报告上报各类事件给当前连接的源基站，例如，UE当前服务小区的信号强度低于门限且目标小区的信号强度高于门限。After the UE measures a series of cells according to the RRC reconfiguration message, it forms a report and reports various events to the currently connected source base station. For example, the signal strength of the UE's current serving cell is lower than the threshold and the signal strength of the target cell is higher than the threshold.
S930，源基站进行切换决定。S930, the source base station makes a handover decision.
S940，源基站向目标基站发送切换请求消息。S940, the source base station sends a handover request message to the target base station.
源基站接收到UE上报的测量报告之后，根据测量报告决定UE是否进行切换，如果决定切换，则源基站向目标基站发送切换请求消息。After receiving the measurement report reported by the UE, the source base station determines whether the UE performs handover according to the measurement report, and if the handover is decided, the source base station sends a handover request message to the target base station.
S950，目标基站进行接入控制。S950, the target base station performs access control.
S960，目标基站向源基站发送切换请求确认消息。S960, the target base station sends a handover request confirmation message to the source base station.
目标基站可以根据自身连接数等情况决定是否允许UE接入，如果目标基站允许UE接入，则目标基站向源基站发送切换请求确认消息。切换请求确认消息中可以包含新的小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identifier，C-RNTI)、目标基站安全相关算法等参数。The target base station may decide whether to allow the UE to access according to the number of its own connections, and if the target base station allows the UE to access, the target base station sends a handover request confirmation message to the source base station. The handover request confirmation message may include parameters such as a new cell radio network temporary identifier (cell radio network temporary identifier, C-RNTI), a target base station security-related algorithm, and the like.
S970，源基站向UE发送RRC重配置消息。S970, the source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the UE.
源基站在接收到来自目标基站的切换请求确认消息之后，向UE发送RRC重配置消息。源基站向UE发送的也可以是切换命令。After receiving the handover request confirmation message from the target base station, the source base station sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the UE. What the source base station sends to the UE may also be a handover command.
RRC重配置消息中可以包括目标基站向源基站发送的切换请求确认消息，相当于源基站这层是透明的。具体地，NR***中的切换命令中包含目标小区的相关信息以及UE接入该目标小区所需的相关配置参数，例如，切换命令中包含目标小区的信息(如，目标小区的物理小区标识以及目标小区对应的频率信息)、目标小区为UE分配的C-RNTI、接入目标小区所需的随机接入(random access channel，RACH)资源(如，专用RACH 资源和/或公共RACH资源)等。The RRC reconfiguration message may include a handover request confirmation message sent by the target base station to the source base station, which is equivalent to the source base station layer being transparent. Specifically, the handover command in the NR system includes the relevant information of the target cell and the relevant configuration parameters required by the UE to access the target cell. For example, the handover command includes the information of the target cell (such as the physical cell identifier of the target cell and frequency information corresponding to the target cell), C-RNTI allocated by the target cell to the UE, random access channel (RACH) resources (such as dedicated RACH resources and/or public RACH resources) required to access the target cell, etc. .
S980，UE对目标基站发起随机接入。S980, the UE initiates random access to the target base station.
UE根据RRC重配置消息对目标基站发起随机接入。现有切换流程中，UE会断开与源基站的连接，在成功接入目标基站之前，UE收发数据会出现短暂的中断。The UE initiates random access to the target base station according to the RRC reconfiguration message. In the existing handover process, the UE will disconnect from the source base station, and before the UE successfully accesses the target base station, there will be a brief interruption in the transmission and reception of data by the UE.
S990，UE向目标基站发送RRC重配置完成消息。S990, the UE sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the target base station.
可以理解，基于下一代(next generation，NG)接口的切换流程与基于Xn接口的切换流程类型，只是源基站与目标基站之间的交互需要通过AMF，例如，源基站将切换请求消息发送给AMF，AMF再将切换请求消息发送给目标基站。It can be understood that the handover process based on the next generation (NG) interface and the handover process type based on the Xn interface, only the interaction between the source base station and the target base station needs to pass through the AMF, for example, the source base station sends a handover request message to the AMF , the AMF sends the handover request message to the target base station.
6、条件切换(conditional handover，CHO)：6. Conditional handover (CHO):
现有技术提出CHO机制以提升切换成功率。即源基站在源链路质量较好时向UE发送CHO配置信息。具体地，源基站可以通过现有的RRC消息发送CHO配置信息，或者，源基站可以通过新定义的RRC消息发送CHO配置信息，例如，该RRC消息可以是条件RRC重配置消息(CondRRCReconfiguration)，或者可以是其他命名/表达形式。该CHO配置信息中可以包括CHO触发条件、一个或多个候选小区的信息(如，候选小区的全球小区识别码，或者，候选小区的物理小区标识以及候选小区对应的频率信息)。UE在接收到CHO配置信息之后，根据该配置信息判断候选小区是否满足切换触发条件，进一步地UE将满足切换触发条件的某候选小区作为目标小区；然后，UE与确定出的目标小区进行随机接入过程，当随机接入成功完成后，UE给目标小区所属的基站(即目标基站)发送RRC消息(RRC重配置完成消息)，以通知目标基站条件切换完成。The prior art proposes a CHO mechanism to improve the handover success rate. That is, the source base station sends the CHO configuration information to the UE when the quality of the source link is good. Specifically, the source base station may send the CHO configuration information through an existing RRC message, or the source base station may send the CHO configuration information through a newly defined RRC message, for example, the RRC message may be a conditional RRC reconfiguration message (CondRRCReconfiguration), or May be other naming/expression forms. The CHO configuration information may include a CHO trigger condition and information of one or more candidate cells (eg, the global cell identifier of the candidate cell, or the physical cell identifier of the candidate cell and frequency information corresponding to the candidate cell). After receiving the CHO configuration information, the UE determines whether the candidate cell satisfies the handover trigger condition according to the configuration information, and further uses a candidate cell that satisfies the handover trigger condition as the target cell; then, the UE randomly connects with the determined target cell. In the entry process, when the random access is successfully completed, the UE sends an RRC message (RRC reconfiguration complete message) to the base station to which the target cell belongs (ie, the target base station) to notify the target base station that the conditional handover is completed.
7、卫星通信：7. Satellite communication:
卫星通信即非地面网络(non-terrestrial network，NTN)通信。卫星通信的研究从19实际60年代之间一直是研究领域的热门。得益于现如今(任意时间、任意地点)通信的概念，卫星通信网络的地位在未来还将进一步地提升。通常来说，卫星的轨道越高其覆盖面积越大，但是通信的时延也越长。Satellite communication is non-terrestrial network (NTN) communication. The research of satellite communication has been a hot topic in the research field since the 1960s. Thanks to the concept of communication (any time, any place) today, the status of satellite communication networks will be further improved in the future. Generally speaking, the higher the orbit of the satellite, the larger the coverage area, but the longer the communication delay.
一般来说，卫星的运行轨道根据高度可以分为低轨道(LEO)、中轨道(MEO)和静止轨道(GEO)。其中，LEO的轨道高度为160～2 000km，MEO的轨道高度为2 000～35 786km，GEO的轨道高度为35 786km。运行在GEO上的卫星与地球的相对位置不受地球自转的影响。Generally speaking, the orbits of satellites can be divided into low orbit (LEO), medium orbit (MEO) and geostationary orbit (GEO) according to the altitude. Among them, the orbital height of LEO is 160-2000km, the orbital height of MEO is 2000-35786km, and the orbital height of GEO is 35786km. The position of satellites operating on GEO relative to the Earth is not affected by the Earth's rotation.
可以理解的是，低轨通信卫星距离地面近、通信时延短、数据传输率高，移动终端体积与个人移动设备相差无几，比较适合大众市场普及，成为当前产业发展的热点。It is understandable that low-orbit communication satellites are close to the ground, have short communication delays, and have high data transmission rates. The size of mobile terminals is almost the same as that of personal mobile devices.
NTN作为一种地面网络(terrestrial network，TN)的补充，可以覆盖还有、沙漠、深山、极地等各种地面基站不适合部署的区域。但同时，由于目前阶段的NTN部署成本高，因此，NTN的收费比TN贵。但随着多国天地一体化进程，卫星发射成本的下降，航空微电子的发展，NTN部署的成本也在不断下降。As a supplement to a terrestrial network (TN), NTN can cover various areas where terrestrial base stations are not suitable for deployment, such as deserts, deep mountains, and polar regions. But at the same time, due to the high cost of NTN deployment at the current stage, NTN is more expensive than TN. However, with the integration process of multinational space and earth, the cost of satellite launch and the development of avionics, the cost of NTN deployment is also declining.
随着NTN的日益密集，与TN交叠的场景也增多。并且NTN和TN之间不同的用户体验和收费，会让不同消费者有不同的选择。With the increasing density of NTNs, the scenes overlapping with TNs also increase. And different user experience and charges between NTN and TN will make different consumers have different choices.
目前NTN和TN之间是支持移动性的，但是现在UE选择TN还是NTN都是网络控制和协议限定的，因此用户没有选择的自由度，例如有些在乎网络服务的消费者会觉得NTN和TN都可以，而有些节约的消费者只想要TN(虽然UE具备NTN接入能力)。目 前用户并没有自行选择接入NTN或TN的自由度。Currently, mobility is supported between NTN and TN. However, whether the UE chooses TN or NTN is limited by network control and protocols, so users have no freedom of choice. For example, some consumers who care about network services will feel that both NTN and TN are Yes, but some frugal consumers only want TN (although UEs have NTN access capability). At present, users do not have the freedom to choose to access NTN or TN by themselves.
有鉴于此，本申请实施例提供一种接入网络的方法，可以使得终端设备自主选择接入NTN网络或TN网络。In view of this, the embodiments of the present application provide a method for accessing a network, which can enable a terminal device to independently choose to access an NTN network or a TN network.
下面结合附图说明本申请实施例提供的选择网络的方法。The method for selecting a network provided by the embodiments of the present application is described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
应理解，下文示出的实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定，只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例提供的方法的代码的程序，以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可，例如，本社区内实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备，或者是终端设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。It should be understood that the embodiments shown below do not particularly limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be executed according to the present application. It is sufficient to communicate with the method provided by the example. For example, the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment in this community may be a terminal device, or a functional module in the terminal device that can call a program and execute the program.
需要说明的是，下文所述的NTN网络表示网络类型是NTN的网络，TN网络表示网络类型是TN的网络。下文所述的服务网络可以是终端设备的选择的公共陆地移动网络或私网，也可以是终端设备选择驻留或接入的小区。It should be noted that the NTN network described below refers to a network whose network type is NTN, and the TN network refers to a network whose network type is TN. The service network described below may be a public land mobile network or a private network selected by the terminal device, or may be a cell selected by the terminal device to camp on or access.
图10示出了本申请实施例提供的选择网络的方法的示意图。图10所示的方法可以由图2中的终端设备执行。图10所示的方法可以包括S1010和S1020，下面详细描述各个步骤。FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of a method for selecting a network provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method shown in FIG. 10 may be executed by the terminal device in FIG. 2 . The method shown in FIG. 10 may include S1010 and S1020, and each step will be described in detail below.
S1010，终端设备根据第一判定结果确定候选网络类型包括NTN和/或TN，第一判定结果包括以下至少一种判定结果：终端设备是否处于第一模式、终端设备是否具备NTN接入能力、终端设备是否被允许接入NTN。S1010, the terminal device determines that the candidate network types include NTN and/or TN according to the first determination result, and the first determination result includes at least one of the following determination results: whether the terminal device is in the first mode, whether the terminal device has NTN access capability, the terminal device Whether the device is allowed to access NTN.
其中，在第一模式下终端设备根据第一网络类型选择服务网络，第一网络类型包括以下至少一个：NTN、TN。也就是说，在第一模式，终端设备选择的服务网络的类型是第一网络类型。具体地，终端设备在第一模式下可以用于选择服务网络的第一网络类型是预定义的。Wherein, in the first mode, the terminal device selects a service network according to a first network type, and the first network type includes at least one of the following: NTN, TN. That is, in the first mode, the type of service network selected by the terminal device is the first network type. Specifically, the first network type that the terminal device can use to select the serving network in the first mode is predefined.
可选地，在第一模式下，终端设备根据第一网络类型选择服务网络，可以理解为，终端设备优先选择第一网络类型的网络作为服务网络。Optionally, in the first mode, the terminal device selects the service network according to the first network type. It can be understood that the terminal device preferentially selects a network of the first network type as the service network.
例如，在第一模式下终端设备可以用于选择服务网络的第一网络类型为NTN。即，在第一模式下，终端设备选择NTN网络作为服务网络；或者，终端设备优先选择NTN网络作为服务网络。若终端设备不处于第一模式，则终端设备可以用于选择服务网络的第二网络类型为TN。即，若终端设备不处于第一模式下，则终端设备选择TN网络作为服务网络；或者，终端设备优先选择TN网络作为服务网络。For example, in the first mode, the first network type that the terminal device can use to select the service network is NTN. That is, in the first mode, the terminal device selects the NTN network as the service network; or the terminal device preferentially selects the NTN network as the service network. If the terminal device is not in the first mode, the second network type that the terminal device can use to select the service network is TN. That is, if the terminal device is not in the first mode, the terminal device selects the TN network as the service network; or the terminal device preferentially selects the TN network as the service network.
又例如，在第一模式下终端设备可以用于选择服务网络的第一网络类型为TN。即，在第一模式下，终端设备选择TN网络作为服务网络；或者，终端设备优先选择TN网络作为服务网络。若终端设备不处于第一模式，则终端设备可以用于选择服务网络的第二网络类型为NTN。即，终端设备可以选择NTN网络作为服务网络；或者终端设备可以优先选择NTN网络作为服务网络。For another example, in the first mode, the first network type that the terminal device can use to select the service network is TN. That is, in the first mode, the terminal device selects the TN network as the service network; or, the terminal device preferentially selects the TN network as the service network. If the terminal device is not in the first mode, the second network type that the terminal device can use to select the service network is NTN. That is, the terminal device may select the NTN network as the service network; or the terminal device may preferentially select the NTN network as the service network.
再例如，在第一模式下终端设备可以用于选择服务网络的第一网络类型为NTN和TN。即，在第一模式下，终端设备选择NTN或TN作为服务网络。若终端设备不处于第一模式，则终端设备可以用于选择服务网络的第二网络类型为TN。即，终端设备可以选择TN网络作为服务网络；或者，终端设备可以优先选择TN网络作为服务网络。For another example, in the first mode, the first network types that the terminal device can use to select the service network are NTN and TN. That is, in the first mode, the terminal device selects NTN or TN as the serving network. If the terminal device is not in the first mode, the second network type that the terminal device can use to select the service network is TN. That is, the terminal device may select the TN network as the service network; or, the terminal device may preferentially select the TN network as the service network.
若终端设备只根据是否处于第一模式确定候选网络类型，则终端设备可以将上文所述的第一网络类型确定为候选网络类型。If the terminal device only determines the candidate network type according to whether it is in the first mode, the terminal device may determine the above-mentioned first network type as the candidate network type.
本申请实施例对终端设备如何开启或关闭第一模式的方式不做限定。The embodiments of the present application do not limit the manner in which the terminal device enables or disables the first mode.
作为一个示例，第一模式的开启或关闭由网络设备指示。例如，终端设备在接收到来自网络设备的第一指示信息的情况下，根据第一指示信息确定处于第一模式。第一指示信息用于指示终端设备处于第一模式。As an example, the on or off of the first mode is indicated by the network device. For example, in the case of receiving the first indication information from the network device, the terminal device determines that it is in the first mode according to the first indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device is in the first mode.
作为另一个示例，第一模式的开启或关闭可以由用户设置。例如，用户可以通过点击预设的按键开启或关闭第一模式。As another example, the on or off of the first mode may be set by the user. For example, the user can turn on or turn off the first mode by clicking a preset button.
可选地，在终端设备被用户设置为处于第一模式之前，终端设备展示是否将终端设备设置为处于第一模式的选项。进一步地，用户可以通过点击“是”将终端设备设置为处于第一模式；或者，用户可以通过点击“否”将终端设备设置为不处于第一模式。Optionally, before the terminal device is set to be in the first mode by the user, the terminal device presents an option of whether to set the terminal device to be in the first mode. Further, the user can set the terminal device to be in the first mode by clicking "Yes"; or, the user can set the terminal device to not be in the first mode by clicking "No".
可选地，终端设备可以展示用于关闭或开启第一模式的控件。例如，若终端设备处于第一模式，则终端设备可以展示用于关闭第一模式的控件；若终端设备不处于第一模式，则终端设备可以展示用于开启第一模式的控件。Optionally, the terminal device may present controls for turning off or turning on the first mode. For example, if the terminal device is in the first mode, the terminal device may display a control for turning off the first mode; if the terminal device is not in the first mode, the terminal device may display a control for turning on the first mode.
可选地，终端设备可以通过预设的触摸手势控制第一模式的开启和关闭。Optionally, the terminal device may control turning on and off of the first mode through a preset touch gesture.
可选地，终端设备还可以通过语音指令控制第一模式的开启和关闭。Optionally, the terminal device can also control turning on and off of the first mode through a voice command.
终端设备是否具备接入NTN的能力是由终端设备的硬件资源决定的。若终端设备具备接入NTN的能力，则终端设备可以选择NTN网络和/或TN网络作为服务网络；若终端设备不具备接入NTN的能力，则终端设备可以选择TN网络作为服务网络，不能选择NTN网络作为服务网络。Whether a terminal device has the ability to access NTN is determined by the hardware resources of the terminal device. If the terminal equipment has the ability to access NTN, the terminal equipment can select the NTN network and/or the TN network as the service network; if the terminal equipment does not have the ability to access NTN, the terminal equipment can select the TN network as the service network, and cannot select the TN network as the service network. NTN network as service network.
若终端设备只根据是否具备接入NTN的能力确定候选网络类型，则终端设备在具备NTN接入能力的情况下，可以确定候选网络类型是NTN和/或TN，或者，终端设备在不具备NTN接入能力的情况下，确定候选网络类型是TN。If the terminal device only determines the candidate network type based on whether it has the ability to access NTN, the terminal device can determine that the candidate network type is NTN and/or TN if it has the NTN access capability, or the terminal device does not have the NTN access capability. In the case of access capability, it is determined that the candidate network type is TN.
终端设备是否被允许接入NTN是由终端设备的用户身份的签约信息决定的。终端设备的用户身份可以是以下任意一种：全球用户身份识别单元(universal subscriber identity module，USIM)卡、嵌入式用户身份识别单元(embedded subscriber identity module，eSIM)卡、用户身份识别单元(subscriber identity module，SIM)卡。终端设备的用户身份的签约信息中可以包括终端设备是否允许接入NTN的信息，终端设备可以从核心网获取终端设备的用户身份的签约信息。若终端设备根据用户身份的签约信息确定不被允许接入NTN网络，则终端设备可以选择TN网络作为服务网络；若终端设备根据用户身份的签约信息确定被允许接入NTN网络，则终端设备可以选择NTN网络和/或TN网络作为服务网络。Whether the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN is determined by the subscription information of the user identity of the terminal device. The user identity of the terminal device can be any of the following: a universal subscriber identity module (USIM) card, an embedded subscriber identity module (eSIM) card, a subscriber identity module (subscriber identity) module, SIM) card. The subscription information of the user identity of the terminal device may include information on whether the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN, and the terminal device may obtain the subscription information of the user identity of the terminal device from the core network. If the terminal device determines that it is not allowed to access the NTN network according to the subscription information of the user identity, the terminal device can select the TN network as the service network; if the terminal device determines that it is allowed to access the NTN network according to the subscription information of the user identity, the terminal device can Select NTN network and/or TN network as service network.
若终端设备只根据是否被允许接入NTN确定候选网络类型，则终端设备在被允许接入NTN的情况下，可以确定候选网络类型是NTN网络和/或TN网络，或者，终端设备在不被允许接入NTN网络的情况下，确定候选网络类型是TN网络。If the terminal device determines the candidate network type only according to whether it is allowed to access the NTN, the terminal device can determine that the candidate network type is the NTN network and/or the TN network when the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN, or the terminal device is not allowed to access the NTN. In the case of allowing access to the NTN network, it is determined that the candidate network type is the TN network.
终端设备还可以根据以上多项确定候选网络类型是NTN和/或TN。下文以终端设备处于第一模式时可以用于选择服务网络的第一网络类型为NTN为例进行说明。The terminal device may also determine that the candidate network type is NTN and/or TN according to the above items. The following description takes as an example that the first network type that can be used to select the service network when the terminal device is in the first mode is NTN.
例如，若终端设备根据是否处于第一模式和是否具备接入NTN的能力确定候选网络类型，则终端设备在处于第一模式且具备NTN接入能力的情况下，可以确定候选网络类型是NTN，或者，终端设备在不处于第一模式和/或不具备NTN接入能力的情况下，确定候选网络类型是TN。For example, if the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it is in the first mode and has the ability to access NTN, then the terminal device can determine that the candidate network type is NTN when it is in the first mode and has the NTN access capability. Alternatively, the terminal device determines that the candidate network type is TN when it is not in the first mode and/or does not have the NTN access capability.
又例如，若终端设备根据是否处于第一模式和是否被允许接入NTN确定候选网络类 型，则终端设备在处于第一模式且被允许接入NTN的情况下，可以确定候选网络类型是NTN，或者，终端设备在不处于第一模式和/或不被允许接入NTN的情况下，可以确定候选网络类型是TN。For another example, if the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it is in the first mode and whether it is allowed to access NTN, the terminal device can determine that the candidate network type is NTN when it is in the first mode and is allowed to access NTN, Alternatively, the terminal device may determine that the candidate network type is TN when it is not in the first mode and/or is not allowed to access the NTN.
再例如，若终端设备根据是否具备接入NTN的能力和是否被允许接入NTN确定候选网络类型，则终端设备在具备接入NTN的能力且被允许接入NTN的情况下，可以确定候选网络类型是NTN，或者，终端设备在不具备接入NTN的能力和/或不被允许接入NTN的情况下，可以确定候选网络类型是TN。For another example, if the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it has the ability to access NTN and whether it is allowed to access NTN, the terminal device can determine the candidate network when it has the ability to access NTN and is allowed to access NTN. The type is NTN, or the terminal device may determine that the candidate network type is TN when it does not have the ability to access NTN and/or is not allowed to access NTN.
再例如，若终端设备根据是否处于第一模式、是否具备接入NTN的能力、是否被允许接入NTN确定候选网络类型，则终端设备在满足以下条件的情况下确定候选网络类型是NTN：处于第一模式、具备接入NTN的能力、被允许接入NTN，或者，终端设备在不处于第一模式和/或不具备NTN接入能力和/或不被允许接入NTN的情况下，确定候选网络类型是TN。For another example, if the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it is in the first mode, has the ability to access NTN, and is allowed to access NTN, the terminal device determines that the candidate network type is NTN if the following conditions are met: The first mode, having the ability to access NTN, and being allowed to access NTN, or, if the terminal device is not in the first mode and/or does not have NTN access capability and/or is not allowed to access NTN, determine The candidate network type is TN.
S1020，终端设备根据候选网络类型选择服务网络进行驻留或接入。S1020, the terminal device selects a serving network for camping on or accessing according to the candidate network type.
终端设备确定候选网络类型之后，根据候选网络选择服务网络。即根据候选网络类型选择公共陆地移动网络或私网，进一步地，终端设备可以选择适合小区(suitable cell)进行驻留或接入。After determining the candidate network type, the terminal device selects the serving network according to the candidate network. That is, the public land mobile network or the private network is selected according to the candidate network type, and further, the terminal device can select a suitable cell (suitable cell) for camping or accessing.
可以理解，终端设备选择的服务网络的网络类型属于候选网络类型。例如，候选网络类型是NTN，则终端设备选择NTN网络作为服务网络；候选网络类型是TN，则终端设备选择TN网络作为服务网络。It can be understood that the network type of the serving network selected by the terminal device belongs to the candidate network type. For example, if the candidate network type is NTN, the terminal device selects the NTN network as the service network; the candidate network type is TN, then the terminal device selects the TN network as the service network.
可选地，若终端设备根据候选网络类型选择不到服务网络，则终端设备可以停留在其他网络类型的网络中。例如，终端设备可以选择一个可接受的小区(acceptable cell)。在此情况下，终端设备不能与网络设备进行通信，但是可以进行紧急业务，例如可以进行紧急呼叫业务。Optionally, if the terminal device cannot select a service network according to the candidate network type, the terminal device may stay in a network of other network types. For example, the terminal device may select an acceptable cell. In this case, the terminal device cannot communicate with the network device, but can perform emergency services, such as emergency call services.
可选地，在终端设备根据是否处于第一模式确定候选网络类型的情况下，若终端设备根据候选网络类型选择不到服务网络，则终端设备可以向用户展示提示信息，用于告知用户终端设备在当前所述的模式下无法选择到服务网络。进一步地，用户还可以根据该提示信息关闭或开启第一模式。Optionally, in the case where the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it is in the first mode, if the terminal device cannot select a service network according to the candidate network type, the terminal device can display prompt information to the user to inform the user terminal device. The service network cannot be selected in the currently described mode. Further, the user can also turn off or turn on the first mode according to the prompt information.
例如，若终端设备根据在处于第一模式的情况下确定的候选网络类型为NTN，则终端设备在选择不到服务网络的情况下，可以向用户展示提示信息。进一步地，用户可以根据该指示信息关闭第一模式。以使得终端设备可以将候选网络类型确定为TN，并选择TN网络作为服务网络。For example, if the terminal device determines that the candidate network type is NTN when it is in the first mode, the terminal device may display prompt information to the user if the service network cannot be selected. Further, the user can turn off the first mode according to the indication information. So that the terminal device can determine the candidate network type as TN, and select the TN network as the serving network.
可选地，终端设备所确定的候选网络类型是在进行服务网络选择过程中，优先级最高的网络类型。例如，若候选网络类型是NTN，则终端设备优先选择NTN网络作为服务网络，在选择不到NTN网络的情况下，终端设备可以选择TN网络作为服务网络；若候选网络类型是TN，则终端设备优先选择TN网络作为服务网络，在选择不到TN网络的情况下，终端设备可以选择NTN网络作为服务网络。Optionally, the candidate network type determined by the terminal device is the network type with the highest priority in the process of selecting the serving network. For example, if the candidate network type is NTN, the terminal device preferentially selects the NTN network as the service network. If the NTN network cannot be selected, the terminal device can select the TN network as the service network; if the candidate network type is TN, the terminal device The TN network is preferentially selected as the service network. In the case where the TN network cannot be selected, the terminal device can select the NTN network as the service network.
在本申请实施例中，终端设备可以根据自身的能力、所处的模式、用户身份的签约信息确定候选网络类型是NTN和/或TN，从而使得终端设备确定候选网络类型的方式不再局限于网络控制或协议限定。此外，在终端设备根据是否处于第一模式确定候选网络类型， 且终端设备是否处于第一模式是由用户设置的情况下，相当于终端设备在确定候选网络类型时，考虑了用户的需求，从而可以提升用户体验。In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device can determine that the candidate network type is NTN and/or TN according to its own capabilities, the mode it is in, and the subscription information of the user identity, so that the method for the terminal device to determine the candidate network type is no longer limited to Network control or protocol qualification. In addition, when the terminal device determines the candidate network type according to whether it is in the first mode, and whether the terminal device is in the first mode is set by the user, it is equivalent to that the terminal device considers the user's needs when determining the candidate network type, so that Can improve user experience.
下面结合图11说明在基于本申请实施例提供的方法确定候选网络类型的情况下，终端设备进行服务网络选择的方法。The following describes a method for a terminal device to select a service network in the case of determining a candidate network type based on the method provided by the embodiment of the present application with reference to FIG. 11 .
如图11所示，方法1100以终端设备的AS层、NAS层、应用层之间的交互说明终端设备进行网络选择和小区选择的方法。方法1100可以包括S1110至S1170，下面详细说明各个步骤。As shown in FIG. 11 , the method 1100 illustrates the method for the terminal device to perform network selection and cell selection based on the interaction between the AS layer, the NAS layer, and the application layer of the terminal device. The method 1100 may include S1110 to S1170, and each step will be described in detail below.
S1110，终端设备的NAS层向AS层发送第二指示信息。S1110, the NAS layer of the terminal device sends the second indication information to the AS layer.
第二指示信息用于指示AS层获取与候选网络类型对应的网络标识。与候选网络类型对应的网络标识可以理解为，与候选网络类型中的至少一个网络类型对应的网络标识。例如，候选网络类型为NTN和TN，则与候选网络类型对应的网络标识为与NTN和/或TN对应的网络标识。The second indication information is used to instruct the AS layer to obtain the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type. The network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type may be understood as a network identifier corresponding to at least one network type in the candidate network types. For example, if the candidate network types are NTN and TN, the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type is the network identifier corresponding to NTN and/or TN.
本申请实施例对终端设备选择的网络不做限定，相应地，与不同网络对应的网络标识也不同。例如，终端设备选择的网络是公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)，与PLMN对应的网络标识是PLMN标识(identity，ID)；又例如，终端设备选择的网络是私网中的独立私网(standalone non-public network，SNPN)，与SNPN对应的网络标识是SNPN ID(由PLMN ID和私网(non-public network，NPN)ID组成)；再例如，终端设备选择的网络是非独立私网(public network integrated-non-public network，PNI-NPN)，对应的网络标识是PNI-NPN ID(由PLMN ID和封闭接入组(closed access group，CAG)ID组成)；再例如，终端设备选择的网络是非封闭接入组，对应的网络标识是CAG ID。下文中以终端设备选择PLMN为例进行说明，相应地，下文中以网络标识是PLMN ID为例。This embodiment of the present application does not limit the network selected by the terminal device, and correspondingly, the network identifiers corresponding to different networks are also different. For example, the network selected by the terminal device is a public land mobile network (PLMN), and the network identity corresponding to the PLMN is a PLMN identity (identity, ID). For another example, the network selected by the terminal device is an independent private network. Private network (standalone non-public network, SNPN), the network identifier corresponding to the SNPN is the SNPN ID (composed of the PLMN ID and the private network (non-public network, NPN) ID); for another example, the network selected by the terminal device is non-independent Private network (public network integrated-non-public network, PNI-NPN), the corresponding network identifier is PNI-NPN ID (composed of PLMN ID and closed access group (CAG) ID); another example, terminal The network selected by the device is a non-closed access group, and the corresponding network identifier is the CAG ID. In the following, the terminal equipment selects the PLMN as an example for description, and accordingly, in the following, the network identifier is the PLMN ID as an example.
第二指示信息指示AS层获取与候选网络类型对应的网络标识可以理解为，第二指示信息指示AS层获取部署了候选网络类型的PLMN的ID。例如，若候选网络类型是NTN，则第二指示信息指示AS层获取部署了NTN的PLMN的ID；又例如，若候选网络类型是TN，则第二指示信息指示AS层获取部署了TN的PLMN的ID；又例如，若候选网络类型是NTN和TN，则第二指示至少AS层获取部署了TN和/或NTN的PLMN的ID。The second indication information instructing the AS layer to acquire the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type can be understood as the second indication information instructing the AS layer to acquire the ID of the PLMN on which the candidate network type is deployed. For example, if the candidate network type is NTN, the second indication information instructs the AS layer to acquire the ID of the PLMN deployed with NTN; for another example, if the candidate network type is TN, the second indication information instructs the AS layer to acquire the PLMN deployed with TN For another example, if the candidate network types are NTN and TN, the second indication is that at least the AS layer obtains the ID of the PLMN on which TN and/or NTN are deployed.
可选地，第二指示信息可以用于指示AS层获取网络标识。在此情况下，AS层不仅可以获取与候选网络类型对应的网络标识，还可以获取与候选网络类型之外的网络类型对应的网络标识。例如，候选网络类型是NTN，终端设备可以获取部署了NTN和/或TN的PLMN的ID。Optionally, the second indication information may be used to instruct the AS layer to acquire the network identifier. In this case, the AS layer can not only acquire network identifiers corresponding to the candidate network types, but also acquire network identifiers corresponding to network types other than the candidate network types. For example, the candidate network type is NTN, and the terminal device can obtain the ID of the PLMN where NTN and/or TN are deployed.
S1120，终端设备的AS层获取一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息。S1120, the AS layer of the terminal device acquires one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information.
终端设备的AS层可以获取一个或多个网络标识。可以理解，AS层可以通过读取接收到的一个或多个***消息块1(system information block 1，SIB1)获取一个或多个PLMN ID。具体地，AS层获取PLMN ID的方法还可以参考现有技术。The AS layer of the terminal device can obtain one or more network identifiers. It can be understood that the AS layer can obtain one or more PLMN IDs by reading one or more received system information block 1 (system information block 1, SIB1). Specifically, the method for acquiring the PLMN ID by the AS layer may also refer to the prior art.
在AS层只获取到网络标识的情况下，AS层可以根据第一映射关系确定不同网络标识下部署的网络类型。第一映射关系用于指示不同网络标识与不同网络类型的对应关系。如表1所示，若AS层获取到PLMN ID#1，则AS层根据第一映射关系可以知道PLMN ID#1下部署NTN；若AS层获取到PLMN ID#2，则AS层根据第一映射关系可以知道PLMN ID#2 下部署TN；若AS层获取到PLMN ID#3，则AS层根据第一映射关系可以知道PLMN ID#3下部署NTN和TN；若AS层获取到PLMN ID#4，则AS层根据第一映射关系可以知道PLMN ID#4下部署TN。In the case where the AS layer only obtains the network identifier, the AS layer may determine the types of networks deployed under different network identifiers according to the first mapping relationship. The first mapping relationship is used to indicate the corresponding relationship between different network identifiers and different network types. As shown in Table 1, if the AS layer obtains PLMN ID#1, the AS layer can know that NTN is deployed under PLMN ID#1 according to the first mapping relationship; The mapping relationship can know that TN is deployed under PLMN ID#2; if the AS layer obtains PLMN ID#3, the AS layer can know that the NTN and TN are deployed under PLMN ID#3 according to the first mapping relationship; if the AS layer obtains PLMN ID# 4. The AS layer can know that the TN is deployed under the PLMN ID#4 according to the first mapping relationship.
表1Table 1
网络标识network identity 网络类型Network Type
PLMN ID#1PLMN ID#1 NTNNTN
PLMN ID#2 PLMN ID#2 TNTN
PLMN ID#3PLMN ID#3 NTN和TNNTN and TN
PLMN ID#4PLMN ID#4 TNTN
AS层还可以获取一个或多个网络标识和一个或多个第三指示信息。AS层接收到的一个或多个SIB1中还可以包括网络标识和第三指示信息。即，AS层同样可以通过读取接收到的一个或多个SIB1获取一个或多个第三指示信息。一个或多个第三指示信息与一个或多个网络标识对应，第三指示信息用于指示所对应的网络标识下部署了NTN和/或TN。The AS layer may also acquire one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information. The one or more SIB1s received by the AS layer may further include a network identifier and third indication information. That is, the AS layer can also acquire one or more third indication information by reading one or more received SIB1s. One or more third indication information corresponds to one or more network identifiers, and the third indication information is used to indicate that NTN and/or TN are deployed under the corresponding network identifier.
一个或多个网络标识与一个或多个第三指示信息的对应关系可以是一一对应，也可以是多对一。The correspondence between the one or more network identifiers and the one or more third indication information may be a one-to-one correspondence, or a many-to-one correspondence.
例如，AS层接收到多个SIB1，每个SIB1中都包括一个PLMN ID和一个第三指示信息，则多个PLMN ID和多个第三指示信息可以是一一对应的。例如表2所示。For example, if the AS layer receives multiple SIB1s, and each SIB1 includes a PLMN ID and a third indication information, then the multiple PLMN IDs and the multiple third indication information may be in one-to-one correspondence. For example, as shown in Table 2.
表2Table 2
SIB1SIB1 PLMN IDPLMN ID 第三指示信息third indication information
SIB1#1SIB1#1 PLMN ID#1PLMN ID#1 第三指示信息#1Third indication information #1
SIB1#2 SIB1#2 PLMN ID#2 PLMN ID#2 第三指示信息#2Third indication information #2
SIB1#3SIB1#3 PLMN ID#3PLMN ID#3 第三指示信息#3Third indication information #3
SIB1#4SIB1#4 PLMN ID#4PLMN ID#4 第三指示信息#4Third indication information #4
又例如，AS层接收到多个SIB1，某个SIB1中包括多个PLMN ID和一个第三指示信息，则多个PLMN ID和多个第三指示信息可以是多对一的对应关系。例如表3所示。For another example, if the AS layer receives multiple SIB1s, and a certain SIB1 includes multiple PLMN IDs and one third indication information, then the multiple PLMN IDs and the multiple third indication information may be in a many-to-one correspondence. For example, as shown in Table 3.
表3table 3
Figure PCTCN2020115508-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020115508-appb-000001
在网络共享的情况下，多个PLMN用同一个小区提供服务，因此AS层获取到的SIB1中可能包括多个PLMN ID。例如表2所示，AS层获取到的SIB1#5中包括PLMN ID#5和PLMN ID#6。若PLMN ID#5和PLMN ID#6下部署的网络类型相同，则SIB1#5中可以只包括一个第三指示信息#5，用于指示PLMN ID#5和PLMN ID#6下部署了NTN和/或TN； 若PLMN ID#5和PLMN ID#6下部署的网络类型不同，则SIB1#5中可以包括两个第三指示信息，例如第三指示信息#5用于指示PLMN ID#5下部署了NTN和/或TN，第三指示信息#6用于指示PLMN ID#6下部署了NTN和/或TN。In the case of network sharing, multiple PLMNs use the same cell to provide services, so the SIB1 obtained by the AS layer may include multiple PLMN IDs. For example, as shown in Table 2, the SIB1#5 obtained by the AS layer includes PLMN ID#5 and PLMN ID#6. If the network types deployed under PLMN ID#5 and PLMN ID#6 are the same, SIB1#5 may include only one third indication information #5 to indicate that NTN and PLMN ID#6 are deployed under PLMN ID#5 and PLMN ID#6. / or TN; If the types of networks deployed under PLMN ID#5 and PLMN ID#6 are different, SIB1#5 may include two third indication information, for example, the third indication information #5 is used to indicate that under PLMN ID#5 NTN and/or TN are deployed, and the third indication information #6 is used to indicate that NTN and/or TN are deployed under PLMN ID #6.
AS层可以在接收到第二指示信息的情况下，获取一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息。如上文所述，第二指示信息可以用于指示AS层获取与候选网络类型对应的网络标识，则在此情况下，AS层获取到的一个或多个网络标识与候选网络类型对应。第二指示信息还可以用于指示AS层获取网络标识，则在此情况下，AS层可以获取与候选网络类型对应的网络标识，也可以获取与候选网络类型不对应的网络标识。The AS layer may acquire one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information in the case of receiving the second indication information. As described above, the second indication information may be used to instruct the AS layer to obtain a network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type. In this case, one or more network identifiers obtained by the AS layer correspond to the candidate network type. The second indication information may also be used to instruct the AS layer to obtain a network identifier. In this case, the AS layer may obtain a network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type, or may obtain a network identifier that does not correspond to the candidate network type.
可选地，AS可以自动获取一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息，即方法1100可以不执行S1110。在此情况下，AS层可以获取所有能获取到的一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息，即AS层获取到的网络标识可能与候选网络类型对应，也可能与候选网络类型不对应。Optionally, the AS may automatically acquire one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information, that is, the method 1100 may not perform S1110. In this case, the AS layer may acquire all available one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information, that is, the network identifier acquired by the AS layer may correspond to the candidate network type, or may correspond to the candidate network type. The candidate network types do not correspond.
S1130，终端设备的AS层向NAS层发送第一信息。S1130, the AS layer of the terminal device sends the first information to the NAS layer.
第一信息包括一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息。The first information includes one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information.
如上文所述，终端设备的AS层可以获取一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息，进一步地，AS层可以将获取到的一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息发送给NAS层。As described above, the AS layer of the terminal device may acquire one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information, and further, the AS layer may acquire the acquired one or more network identifiers and/or one or more network identifiers. or multiple third indication messages are sent to the NAS layer.
作为一个示例，若AS层接收到第二指示信息，且第二指示信息指示AS层获取与候选网络类型对应的网络标识，则AS层可以将获取到的一个或多个网络标识发送给NAS层，即第一信息包括一个或多个网络标识。可选地，AS层可以将获取到的一个或多个第三指示信息发送给NAS层，即第一信息可以包括一个或多个网络标识和一个或多个第三指示信息。可选地，AS层在获取到第三指示信息的情况下，也可以不向NAS层发送第三指示信息。As an example, if the AS layer receives the second indication information, and the second indication information instructs the AS layer to obtain the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type, the AS layer may send the acquired one or more network identifiers to the NAS layer , that is, the first information includes one or more network identifiers. Optionally, the AS layer may send the acquired one or more third indication information to the NAS layer, that is, the first information may include one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information. Optionally, when the AS layer acquires the third indication information, it may not send the third indication information to the NAS layer.
作为另一个示例，若AS层接收到第二指示信息，且第二指示信指示AS层获取网络标识，则AS层可以将获取到的一个或多个网络标识发送给NAS层，即第一信息包括一个或多个网络标识。若AS层获取还获取到一个或多个第三指示信息，则AS层将一个或多个网络标识和一个或多个第三指示信息发送给NAS层，即第一信息包括一个或多个网络标识和一个或多个第三指示信息。As another example, if the AS layer receives the second indication information, and the second indication information instructs the AS layer to acquire the network identifier, the AS layer may send the acquired one or more network identifiers to the NAS layer, that is, the first information Include one or more network IDs. If the AS layer also obtains one or more third indication information, the AS layer sends one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information to the NAS layer, that is, the first information includes one or more network identifiers identification and one or more third indication information.
作为又一个示例，若AS层自动获取网络标识，则AS层可以将获取到的一个或多个网络标识发送给NAS层，即第一信息包括一个或多个网络标识。若AS层还获取到一个或多个第三指示信息，则AS层将一个或多个网络标识和一个或多个第三指示信息发送给NAS层，即第一信息包括一个或多个网络标识和一个或多个第三指示信息。As another example, if the AS layer automatically acquires the network identifier, the AS layer may send the acquired one or more network identifiers to the NAS layer, that is, the first information includes one or more network identifiers. If the AS layer also acquires one or more third indication information, the AS layer sends one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information to the NAS layer, that is, the first information includes one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information.
可选地，若AS层获取到的一个或多个网络标识中，既有与候选网络了下对应的网络标识，则AS层可以根据一个或多个第三指示信息确定第二网络标识，第二网络标识是AS层获取到的一个或多个网络标识中与候选网络类型对应的网络标识。进一步地，AS层将第二网络标识发送给NAS层。Optionally, if the one or more network identifiers acquired by the AS layer have network identifiers corresponding to the candidate networks, the AS layer can determine the second network identifier according to one or more third indication information, and the first The second network identifier is the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type among the one or more network identifiers acquired by the AS layer. Further, the AS layer sends the second network identifier to the NAS layer.
S1140，终端设备的NAS层确定服务网络标识。S1140, the NAS layer of the terminal device determines the service network identifier.
可以理解，终端设备NAS层确定的服务网络标识与候选网络类型对应，即服务网络标识下部署了候选网络类型。服务网络标识下部署了候选网络类型可以理解为，服务网络 标识下部署了候选网络类型中的至少一个网络类型。例如，候选网络类型为NTN和TN，则与服务网络标识下部署了NTN和/或TN。例如，候选网络类型是NTN，则NAS层确定的PLMN ID下部署了NTN；又例如，候选网络类型是TN，则NAS层确定的PLMN ID下部署了TN。It can be understood that the service network identifier determined by the NAS layer of the terminal device corresponds to the candidate network type, that is, the candidate network type is deployed under the service network identifier. It can be understood that the candidate network types are deployed under the service network identifier, and at least one network type of the candidate network types is deployed under the service network identifier. For example, if the candidate network types are NTN and TN, then NTN and/or TN are deployed under the service network identifier. For example, if the candidate network type is NTN, then NTN is deployed under the PLMN ID determined by the NAS layer; for another example, if the candidate network type is TN, then TN is deployed under the PLMN ID determined by the NAS layer.
在一种实现方式中，终端设备的NAS层可以自动确定服务网络标识。具体地，NAS层可以从部署了候选网络类型的一个或多个网络标识中选择一个网络标识作为服务网络标识。因此，在确定服务网络标识之前，NAS层需要确定AS层上报的一个或多个网络标识下是否部署了候选网络类型。In an implementation manner, the NAS layer of the terminal device can automatically determine the serving network identifier. Specifically, the NAS layer may select one network identifier as the serving network identifier from among one or more network identifiers in which the candidate network type is deployed. Therefore, before determining the service network identifier, the NAS layer needs to determine whether a candidate network type is deployed under one or more network identifiers reported by the AS layer.
若NAS层向AS层发送了第二指示信息，且第二指示信息用于指示AS层获取与候选网络类型对应的网络标识，则NAS层接收到AS层上报的一个或多个网络标识之后，默认一个或多个网络标识下部署了候选网络类型。可选地，若NAS接收到AS层上报的一个或多个网络标识和一个或多个第三指示信息，则NAS层可以根据第三指示信息确定AS层上报的一个或多个网络标识下是否部署了候选网络类型。If the NAS layer sends the second indication information to the AS layer, and the second indication information is used to instruct the AS layer to obtain the network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type, after the NAS layer receives the one or more network identifiers reported by the AS layer, Candidate network types are deployed by default under one or more network IDs. Optionally, if the NAS receives one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information reported by the AS layer, the NAS layer can determine whether the one or more network identifiers reported by the AS layer are under the one or more network identifiers according to the third indication information. Candidate network types are deployed.
若NAS层向AS层发送了第二指示信息，且第二指示信息用于指示AS层获取网络标识，或者，NAS层没有向AS层发送第二指示信息，则NAS层接收到AS层上报的一个或多个网络标识之后，可以根据第一映射关系或者以前的测量配置确定该一个或多个网络标识下是否部署了候选网络类型。可选地，若NAS接收到AS层上报的一个或多个网络标识和一个或多个第三指示信息，则NAS层可以根据第三指示信息确定AS层上报的一个或多个网络标识下是否部署了候选网络类型。If the NAS layer sends the second indication information to the AS layer, and the second indication information is used to instruct the AS layer to obtain the network identifier, or the NAS layer does not send the second indication information to the AS layer, the NAS layer receives the information reported by the AS layer. After the one or more network identifiers are identified, it may be determined whether a candidate network type is deployed under the one or more network identifiers according to the first mapping relationship or the previous measurement configuration. Optionally, if the NAS receives one or more network identifiers and one or more third indication information reported by the AS layer, the NAS layer can determine whether the one or more network identifiers reported by the AS layer are under the one or more network identifiers according to the third indication information. Candidate network types are deployed.
进一步地，NAS层确定出部署了候选网络类型的网络标识之后，可以从部署了候选网络类型的网络标识中确定服务网络标识。Further, after the NAS layer determines the network identifier of the candidate network type deployed, the service network identifier can be determined from the network identifiers of the candidate network type deployed.
在另一种实现方式中，终端设备的NAS层可以手动确定服务网络标识。在此情况下，方法1100还可以包括S1141和S1142。In another implementation manner, the NAS layer of the terminal device may manually determine the serving network identifier. In this case, the method 1100 may further include S1141 and S1142.
S1141，终端设备的NAS层向应用层发送一个或多个网络标识。S1141, the NAS layer of the terminal device sends one or more network identifiers to the application layer.
可以理解，在NAS层手动确定服务网络标识的过程中涉及人机交互，即NAS层可以向用户展示一个或多个网络标识，由用户手动选择一个网络标识。例如，NAS层可以将一个或多个网络标识上传到更高层(例如，应用层)，由用户手动进行选择。It can be understood that the process of manually determining the service network identifier by the NAS layer involves human-computer interaction, that is, the NAS layer can display one or more network identifiers to the user, and the user can manually select a network identifier. For example, the NAS layer may upload one or more network identities to higher layers (eg, the application layer) for manual selection by the user.
可选地，NAS层还可以向应用层发送分别与一个或多个网络标识对应的网络类型。Optionally, the NAS layer may also send network types corresponding to one or more network identifiers to the application layer.
可选地，NAS层还可以向应用层发送分别与一个或多个网络标识对应的网络名称(human readable name)，例如，***、***、小区名字(例如，天网)。Optionally, the NAS layer may also send network names (human readable names) corresponding to one or more network identifiers to the application layer, for example, China Unicom, China Mobile, and cell names (for example, Skynet).
在一种实现方式中，NAS层将从AS层接收到的所有网络标识发送到应用层。可以理解，NAS层向应用层发送的网络标识可以是与候选网络类型对应的网络标识，也可以是与候选网络类型不对应的网络标识。In one implementation, the NAS layer sends all network identities received from the AS layer to the application layer. It can be understood that the network identifier sent by the NAS layer to the application layer may be a network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type, or may be a network identifier not corresponding to the candidate network type.
在另一种实现方式中，NAS确定出部署了候选网络类型的网络标识之后，将部署了候选网络类型的网络标识发送到应用层。In another implementation manner, after determining that the network identifier of the candidate network type is deployed, the NAS sends the network identifier of the candidate network type deployed to the application layer.
S1142，终端设备的NAS层接收第一指令。S1142, the NAS layer of the terminal device receives the first instruction.
第一指令用于指示将第一网络标识确定为服务网络标识，第一网络标识是一个或多个网络标识中的一个。该第一指令可以是用户通过应用层向终端设备的NAS层发送的。本申请实施例对第一指令的形式不做限定，例如，第一指令可以是预设触摸手势，也可以是 语音指令等。The first instruction is used to instruct to determine the first network identifier as the serving network identifier, where the first network identifier is one of one or more network identifiers. The first instruction may be sent by the user to the NAS layer of the terminal device through the application layer. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the form of the first instruction, for example, the first instruction may be a preset touch gesture, or may be a voice instruction or the like.
如上文所述，若NAS层将从AS层获取到的所有网络标识都发送到应用层供用户选择，则有可能用户选择的第一网络标识下没有部署候选网络类型。则在此情况下，NAS层接收到第一指令之后，首先确定第一网络标识下是否部署了候选网络类型，若第一网络标识下部署了候选网络类型，则NAS层将第一网络标识作为服务网络标识。若第一网络标识没有部署候选网络类型，则NAS层向应用层发送指示信息，该指示信息指示用户重新选择，直至用户选择的第一网络标识下部署了候选网络类型。As described above, if the NAS layer sends all network identifiers obtained from the AS layer to the application layer for selection by the user, it is possible that no candidate network type is deployed under the first network identifier selected by the user. In this case, after the NAS layer receives the first instruction, it first determines whether the candidate network type is deployed under the first network identifier. If the candidate network type is deployed under the first network identifier, the NAS layer uses the first network identifier as the Service network ID. If no candidate network type is deployed with the first network identifier, the NAS layer sends indication information to the application layer, the indication information instructing the user to re-select until the candidate network type is deployed under the first network identifier selected by the user.
S1150，终端设备的NAS层向AS层发送服务网络标识。S1150, the NAS layer of the terminal device sends the service network identifier to the AS layer.
在S1150中，NAS层还可以向AS层发送等效PLMN列表和被禁止的TA，用于AS层进行小区选择和重选。In S1150, the NAS layer may also send an equivalent PLMN list and prohibited TAs to the AS layer for the AS layer to perform cell selection and reselection.
S1160，终端设备确定第一小区是否满足第一准则。S1160, the terminal device determines whether the first cell satisfies the first criterion.
S1170，在所述第一小区满足第一准则的情况下，终端设备驻留在第一小区。S1170, in the case that the first cell satisfies the first criterion, the terminal device camps on the first cell.
第一准则为第一小区的至少一个网络标识与候选网络类型对应。The first criterion is that at least one network identifier of the first cell corresponds to the candidate network type.
可以理解，终端设备在处于RRC空闲态或去激活态时，会进行小区选择/重选。基于本申请实施例提供的选择网络的方法，终端设备在进行小区选择/重选的过程中，可以考虑所确定的候选网络类型。即，终端设备在进行小区选择/重选的过程中，选择的第一小区不仅要满足S准则/重选准则，还要满足第一准则。It can be understood that the terminal equipment will perform cell selection/reselection when it is in the RRC idle state or the deactivated state. Based on the method for selecting a network provided by the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may consider the determined candidate network type in the process of cell selection/reselection. That is, in the process of cell selection/reselection by the terminal device, the selected first cell must not only satisfy the S criterion/reselection criterion, but also satisfy the first criterion.
可选地，终端设备可以在进行小区选择/重选的过程中，优先选择满足第一准则的第一小区。可以理解，在此情况下，终端设备在选择不到满足第一准则的第一小区的情况下，可以选择其他的小区。Optionally, the terminal device may preferentially select the first cell that satisfies the first criterion in the process of cell selection/reselection. It can be understood that, in this case, if the terminal device cannot select the first cell that satisfies the first criterion, it can select other cells.
第一小区的至少一个网络标识与目标网类型对应可以理解为，第一小区的至少一个网络标识下部署了候选网络类型。例如，第一小区的网络标识为PLMN ID#1和PLMN ID#2，候选网络类型为NTN，若PLMN ID#1和PLMN ID#2下都没有部署NTN，则第一小区不满足第一准则；若PKMN ID#1和/或PLMN ID#2下部署了NTN，则第一小区满足第一准则。It may be understood that the correspondence between the at least one network identifier of the first cell and the target network type means that a candidate network type is deployed under the at least one network identifier of the first cell. For example, the network identifiers of the first cell are PLMN ID#1 and PLMN ID#2, and the candidate network type is NTN. If NTN is not deployed under both PLMN ID#1 and PLMN ID#2, the first cell does not meet the first criterion ; If NTN is deployed under PKMN ID#1 and/or PLMN ID#2, the first cell satisfies the first criterion.
可以理解，终端设备可以从接收到SIB3、SIB4、SIB5中获取各个小区的网络标识，以及与各个小区的网络标识对应的网络类型。进一步地，终端设备可以确定各个小区是否满足第一准则。It can be understood that the terminal device can acquire the network identifiers of each cell and the network type corresponding to the network identifiers of each cell from the received SIB3, SIB4, and SIB5. Further, the terminal device may determine whether each cell satisfies the first criterion.
可选地，终端设备在进行小区选择/重选的过程中，可以仅测量候选网络类型的频点，也仅选择与候选网络类型对应的小区，忽略广播消息或RRC释放消息或从其他RAT中继承的频点优先级。例如，候选网络类型是TN，则终端设备仅测量TN的频点，也仅选择TN小区。Optionally, in the process of cell selection/reselection, the terminal device may only measure the frequency points of the candidate network type, and only select the cell corresponding to the candidate network type, ignoring broadcast messages or RRC release messages or from other RATs. Inherited frequency priority. For example, if the candidate network type is TN, the terminal device only measures the frequency points of the TN, and only selects the TN cell.
在终端设备确定第一小区满足第一准则的情况下，终端设备可以驻留在第一小区。If the terminal device determines that the first cell satisfies the first criterion, the terminal device may camp on the first cell.
在本申请实施例中，终端设备在进行网络选择和小区选择/重选的过程中，可以在考虑候选网络类型的情况下，灵活地选择部署了NTN/TN的网络和小区。In the embodiments of the present application, in the process of network selection and cell selection/reselection, the terminal device can flexibly select a network and a cell where NTN/TN is deployed, taking into account the candidate network type.
下面结合图12说明在基于本申请实施例提供的方法确定候选网络类型的情况下，终端设备进行小区切换的方法。The following describes a method for a terminal device to perform cell handover when a candidate network type is determined based on the method provided by the embodiment of the present application with reference to FIG. 12 .
如图12所示，方法1200以终端设备、第一网络设备、第二网络设备之间的交互说明终端设备进行小区切换的方法。方法1200可以包括S1210至S1270，下面详细说明各个 步骤。As shown in FIG. 12 , the method 1200 illustrates the method for the terminal device to perform cell handover based on the interaction between the terminal device, the first network device, and the second network device. The method 1200 may include S1210 to S1270, and each step will be described in detail below.
S1210，终端设备与第一小区建立连接。S1210, the terminal device establishes a connection with the first cell.
第一小区所属的网络设备是第一网络设备。第一小区可以是上文方法1100中描述的第一小区，即可以是终端设备在空闲态或去激活态选择驻留的小区。The network device to which the first cell belongs is the first network device. The first cell may be the first cell described in the method 1100 above, that is, it may be a cell where the terminal device chooses to camp in an idle state or a deactivated state.
终端设备与第一小区建立连接的过程可以参考现有技术，为了简洁，本申请实施例不再详述。For the process of establishing a connection between the terminal device and the first cell, reference may be made to the prior art, which is not described in detail in this embodiment of the present application for brevity.
可选地，在终端设备与第一小区建立连接的过程中，终端设备可以向第一网络设备发送第四指示信息，第四指示信息用于指示终端设备确定的候选网络类型。终端设备确定候选网络类型的方法可以参考上文方法1000中的描述。Optionally, in the process of establishing a connection between the terminal device and the first cell, the terminal device may send fourth indication information to the first network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the candidate network type determined by the terminal device. For the method for the terminal device to determine the candidate network type, reference may be made to the description in the method 1000 above.
可选地，终端设备向第一网络设备发送的第四指示信息可以用于指示以下一项或多项：终端设备是否处于第一模式、终端设备是否具备接入NTN的能力、终端设备是否被允许接入NTN。Optionally, the fourth indication information sent by the terminal device to the first network device may be used to indicate one or more of the following: whether the terminal device is in the first mode, whether the terminal device has the ability to access NTN, whether the terminal device is Allow access to NTN.
进一步地，第一网络设备根据第四指示信息可以确定终端设备的候选网络类型。Further, the first network device may determine the candidate network type of the terminal device according to the fourth indication information.
可以理解，第一网络设备确定终端设备的候选网络类型之后，若第一小区的网络标识下没有部署候选网络类型，则第一网络设备拒绝终端设备接入第一小区；若第一小区的至少一个网络标识下部署了候选网络类型，则第一网络设备允许终端设备接入第一小区。It can be understood that after the first network device determines the candidate network type of the terminal device, if no candidate network type is deployed under the network identifier of the first cell, the first network device refuses the terminal device to access the first cell; If a candidate network type is deployed under one network identifier, the first network device allows the terminal device to access the first cell.
S1220，终端设备向第一网络设备发送第四指示信息。S1220, the terminal device sends fourth indication information to the first network device.
如上文所述，终端设备可以在与第一小区建立连接的过程中向第一网络设备发送第四指示信息，在终端设备与第一小区建立连接之后，终端设备也可以向第一网络设备发送第四指示信息。例如，在终端设备与第一小区建立连接之后，若终端设备确定的候选网络类型发生了变化，则终端设备向第一网络设备发送第四指示信息，以指示终端设备确定的新的候选网络类型。As described above, the terminal device may send the fourth indication information to the first network device during the process of establishing the connection with the first cell, and after the terminal device establishes the connection with the first cell, the terminal device may also send the fourth indication information to the first network device Fourth instruction information. For example, after the terminal device establishes a connection with the first cell, if the candidate network type determined by the terminal device changes, the terminal device sends fourth indication information to the first network device to indicate the new candidate network type determined by the terminal device. .
S1230，第一网络设备进行切换决定。S1230, the first network device makes a handover decision.
具体地，第一网络设备根据第四指示信息进行切换决定。即，第一终端设备根据第四指示信息决策是否进行切换或释放终端设备。Specifically, the first network device makes a handover decision according to the fourth indication information. That is, the first terminal device decides whether to switch or release the terminal device according to the fourth indication information.
例如，若第一小区下的网络标识没有部署候选网络类型，且第一网络设备没有找到适合的第二小区，即没有找到部署了候选网络类型的第二小区，则第一网络设备可以释放终端设备。For example, if the network identifier under the first cell does not deploy the candidate network type, and the first network device does not find a suitable second cell, that is, does not find the second cell where the candidate network type is deployed, the first network device can release the terminal equipment.
在第一网络设备确定释放终端设备的情况下，方法1200执行S1241，第一网络设备向终端设备发送RRC释放消息，用于指示终端设备释放与第一小区之间的连接。When the first network device determines to release the terminal device, the method 1200 executes S1241, and the first network device sends an RRC release message to the terminal device to instruct the terminal device to release the connection with the first cell.
可选地，RRC释放消息中可以包括第五指示信息，第五指示信息用于指示第一小区的网络类型。相应地，终端设备根据第五指示信息可以确定释放的原因是第一小区的网络类型与目标小区的网络类型不符。Optionally, the RRC release message may include fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the first cell. Correspondingly, the terminal device may determine, according to the fifth indication information, that the reason for the release is that the network type of the first cell does not match the network type of the target cell.
又例如，若第一小区下的网络标识下没有部署候选网络类型和/或第一小区的信号质量差，且第一网络设备找到了适合的第二小区，则第一网络设备确定将终端设备切换到第二小区。可以理解，在执行切换的过程中，第一小区可以称作源小区，第一网络设备可以称作源网络设备；第二小区可以称作目标小区，第二网络设备可以称作目标网络设备。For another example, if no candidate network type is deployed under the network identifier under the first cell and/or the signal quality of the first cell is poor, and the first network device finds a suitable second cell, the first network device determines to assign the terminal device Switch to the second cell. It can be understood that in the process of performing the handover, the first cell may be referred to as a source cell, and the first network device may be referred to as a source network device; the second cell may be referred to as a target cell, and the second network device may be referred to as a target network device.
在第一网络设备确定将终端设备切换到第二小区的情况下，方法1200执行S1242，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送切换请求消息。第二网络设备是第二小区所属的网络设 备。When the first network device determines to switch the terminal device to the second cell, the method 1200 executes S1242, and the first network device sends a handover request message to the second network device. The second network device is a network device to which the second cell belongs.
可选地，切换请求消息中可以包括第四指示信息。相应地，第二网络设备根据第四指示信息可以确定终端设备的候选网络类型。进一步地，第二网络设备可以根据终端设备的候选网络类型和第二小区的网络类型确定是否允许终端设备接入第二小区。Optionally, the handover request message may include fourth indication information. Correspondingly, the second network device may determine the candidate network type of the terminal device according to the fourth indication information. Further, the second network device may determine whether to allow the terminal device to access the second cell according to the candidate network type of the terminal device and the network type of the second cell.
若第二小区的网络类型与终端设备的候选网络类型相符，则第二网络设备可以允许终端设备接入第二小区，进一步地，方法1200执行S1251，第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送切换确认消息，用于指示第二网络设备允许终端设备接入第二小区。If the network type of the second cell matches the candidate network type of the terminal device, the second network device may allow the terminal device to access the second cell. Further, the method 1200 executes S1251, and the second network device sends a handover signal to the first network device. The confirmation message is used to instruct the second network device to allow the terminal device to access the second cell.
若第二小区的网络类型与终端设备的候选网络类型不符，则第二网络设备可以拒绝终端设备接入第二小区，进一步地，方法1200执行S1252，第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送切换拒绝消息，用于指示第二网络设备拒绝终端设备接入第二小区。If the network type of the second cell does not match the candidate network type of the terminal device, the second network device may refuse the terminal device to access the second cell. Further, the method 1200 executes S1252, and the second network device sends a handover signal to the first network device. The rejection message is used to instruct the second network device to reject the terminal device from accessing the second cell.
可选地，切换拒绝消息中还可以包括第六指示信息，第六指示信息用于指示第二小区的网络类型。相应地，第一网络设备根据第六指示信息可以确定第二网络设备拒绝终端设备接入第二小区的原因是网络类型不符合。Optionally, the handover rejection message may further include sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the second cell. Correspondingly, the first network device may determine, according to the sixth indication information, that the reason why the second network device refuses the terminal device to access the second cell is that the network type does not match.
在第二网络设备允许终端设备接入第二小区的情况下，方法1200还可以执行S1260和S1270。In the case that the second network device allows the terminal device to access the second cell, the method 1200 may further perform S1260 and S1270.
S1260，第二网络设备向终端设备发送RRC配置信息。S1260, the second network device sends RRC configuration information to the terminal device.
RRC配置信息中包括第二小区的信息。The RRC configuration information includes information of the second cell.
S1270，终端设备切换到第二小区。S1270, the terminal device switches to the second cell.
终端设备切换到第二小区的方法可以参考现有技术，为了简洁，本申请实施例不再详述。For the method for switching the terminal device to the second cell, reference may be made to the prior art, which is not described in detail in this embodiment of the present application for the sake of brevity.
应理解，本申请实施例仅以Xn接口的普通切换为例进行说明，本申请实施例还可以应用到CHO机制或双激活协议栈切换(dual active protocol stack handover，DAPS HO)中，或者本申请实施例还可以应用到基于NG接口的切换中。It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application only take the common handover of the Xn interface as an example for description, and the embodiments of the present application may also be applied to the CHO mechanism or the dual active protocol stack handover (DAPS HO), or the present application Embodiments can also be applied to NG interface based handovers.
根据本申请实施例，在进行小区接入和切换的过程中，终端设备可以向网络设备发送指示信息以指示候选网络类型，从而使得网络设备可以在考虑终端设备的候选网络类型的情况下，确定允许或拒绝终端设备接入。According to the embodiments of the present application, in the process of cell access and handover, the terminal device can send indication information to the network device to indicate the candidate network type, so that the network device can determine the candidate network type in consideration of the terminal device's network type. Allow or deny end device access.
应理解，在上文各实施例中，终端设备和/或网络设备可以执行各实施例中的部分或全部步骤。这些步骤或操作仅是示例，本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外，各个步骤可以按照各实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行，并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。且，各步骤的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in the above embodiments, the terminal device and/or the network device may execute some or all of the steps in the embodiments. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations. In addition, various steps may be performed in different orders presented in various embodiments, and may not be required to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application. Moreover, the size of the sequence number of each step does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
图13是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图13所示，该通信装置2000可以包括处理单元2100和收发单元2200。FIG. 13 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13 , the communication apparatus 2000 may include a processing unit 2100 and a transceiver unit 2200 .
可选地，该通信装置2000可对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备，例如，可以为终端设备，或者配置于终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片***等)。Optionally, the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiments, for example, may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device.
应理解，该通信装置2000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法1000至1200中的终端设备，该通信装置2000可以包括用于执行图10中的方法1000、图11中的方法1100、图12中的方法1200中终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且，该通信装置2000中的各单元和 上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图10中的方法1000、图11中的方法1100、图12中的方法1200的相应流程。应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the terminal equipment in the methods 1000 to 1200 according to the embodiments of the present application, and the communication apparatus 2000 may include a method for executing the method 1000 in FIG. 10 , the method 1100 in FIG. 11 , and the method in FIG. 12 . Elements of the method performed by the terminal device in the method 1200 in . In addition, each unit in the communication device 2000 and the above other operations and/or functions are respectively to implement the corresponding flow of the method 1000 in FIG. 10 , the method 1100 in FIG. 11 , and the method 1200 in FIG. 12 . It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the above-mentioned corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
应理解，该通信装置2000为终端设备时，该通信装置2000中的收发单元2200可以通过收发器实现，例如可对应于图14中示出的通信装置3000中的收发器3020或图15中示出的终端设备4000中的收发器4020。该通信装置2000中的处理单元2100可通过至少一个处理器实现，例如可对应于图14中示出的通信装置3000中的处理器3010或图15中示出的终端设备4000中的处理器4010。It should be understood that when the communication apparatus 2000 is a terminal device, the transceiver unit 2200 in the communication apparatus 2000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 3020 in the communication apparatus 3000 shown in FIG. 14 or the transceiver 3020 shown in FIG. 15 . The transceiver 4020 in the terminal device 4000 is output. The processing unit 2100 in the communication apparatus 2000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 3010 in the communication apparatus 3000 shown in FIG. 14 or the processor 4010 in the terminal device 4000 shown in FIG. 15 .
还应理解，该通信装置2000为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片***时，该通信装置2000中的收发单元2200可以通过输入/输出接口、电路等实现，该通信装置2000中的处理单元2100可以通过该芯片或芯片***上集成的处理器、微处理器或集成电路等实现。It should also be understood that when the communication apparatus 2000 is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device, the transceiver unit 2200 in the communication apparatus 2000 may be implemented through input/output interfaces, circuits, etc., and the processing unit 2100 in the communication apparatus 2000 It can be implemented by a processor, microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
可选地，该通信装置2000可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备，例如，可以为网络设备，或者配置于网络设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片***等)。Optionally, the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiments, for example, may be a network device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device.
应理解，该通信装置2000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法1200中的网络设备，该通信装置2000可以包括用于执行图12中的方法1200中网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且，该通信装置2000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图12中的方法1200的相应流程。应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the communication apparatus 2000 may correspond to the network device in the method 1200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 2000 may include a unit for executing the method performed by the network device in the method 1200 in FIG. 12 . Moreover, each unit in the communication apparatus 2000 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 1200 in FIG. 12 . It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the above-mentioned corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
应理解，该通信装置2000为网络设备时，该通信装置2000中的收发单元2200可以通过收发器实现，例如可对应于图14中示出的通信装置3000中的收发器3020或图16中示出的基站5000中的RRU 5100，该通信装置2000中的处理单元2100可通过至少一个处理器实现，例如可对应于图14中示出的通信装置3000中的处理器3010或图16中示出的基站5000中的处理单元5200或处理器5202。It should be understood that when the communication apparatus 2000 is a network device, the transceiver unit 2200 in the communication apparatus 2000 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 3020 in the communication apparatus 3000 shown in FIG. 14 or the transceiver 3020 shown in FIG. 16 . The RRU 5100 in the outgoing base station 5000, the processing unit 2100 in the communication device 2000 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 3010 in the communication device 3000 shown in FIG. 14 or the processor 3010 shown in FIG. 16 . The processing unit 5200 or the processor 5202 in the base station 5000.
还应理解，该通信装置2000为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片***时，该通信装置2000中的收发单元2200可以通过输入/输出接口、电路等实现，该通信装置2000中的处理单元2100可以通过该芯片或芯片***上集成的处理器、微处理器或集成电路等实现。It should also be understood that when the communication apparatus 2000 is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device, the transceiver unit 2200 in the communication apparatus 2000 may be implemented through input/output interfaces, circuits, etc., and the processing unit 2100 in the communication apparatus 2000 It can be implemented by a processor, microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip or chip system.
图14是本申请实施例提供的通信装置3000的另一示意性框图。如图14所示，该通信装置3000包括处理器3010、收发器3020和存储器3030。其中，处理器3010、收发器3020和存储器3030通过内部连接通路互相通信，该存储器3030用于存储指令，该处理器3010用于执行该存储器3030存储的指令，以控制该收发器3020发送信号和/或接收信号。FIG. 14 is another schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus 3000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 14 , the communication device 3000 includes a processor 3010 , a transceiver 3020 and a memory 3030 . The processor 3010, the transceiver 3020 and the memory 3030 communicate with each other through an internal connection path, the memory 3030 is used to store instructions, and the processor 3010 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 3030 to control the transceiver 3020 to send signals and / or receive signals.
应理解，该通信装置3000可以对应于上述方法实施例中的终端设备，并且可以用于执行上述方法实施例中网络设备或终端设备执行的各个步骤和/或流程。可选地，该存储器3030可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器，并向处理器提供指令和数据。存储器的一部分还可以包括非易失性随机存取存储器。存储器3030可以是一个单独的器件，也可以集成在处理器3010中。该处理器3010可以用于执行存储器3030中存储的指令，并且当该处理器3010执行存储器中存储的指令时，该处理器3010用于执行上述与网络设备或终端设备对应的方法实施例的各个步骤和/或流程。It should be understood that the communication apparatus 3000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiments, and may be used to execute various steps and/or processes performed by the network device or the terminal device in the above method embodiments. Optionally, the memory 3030 may include read only memory and random access memory and provide instructions and data to the processor. A portion of the memory may also include non-volatile random access memory. The memory 3030 may be a separate device or may be integrated in the processor 3010 . The processor 3010 may be configured to execute the instructions stored in the memory 3030, and when the processor 3010 executes the instructions stored in the memory, the processor 3010 is configured to execute each of the foregoing method embodiments corresponding to the network device or the terminal device steps and/or processes.
可选地，该通信装置3000是前文实施例中的终端设备。Optionally, the communication apparatus 3000 is the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment.
可选地，该通信装置3000是前文实施例中的网络设备。Optionally, the communication apparatus 3000 is the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
其中，收发器3020可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器3020还可以进一步包括天线，天线的数量可以为一个或多个。该处理器3010和存储器3030与收发器3020可以是集成在不同芯片上的器件。如，处理器3010和存储器3030可以集成在基带芯片中，收发器3020可以集成在射频芯片中。该处理器3010和存储器3030与收发器3020也可以是集成在同一个芯片上的器件。本申请对此不作限定。Among them, the transceiver 3020 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The transceiver 3020 may further include antennas, and the number of the antennas may be one or more. The processor 3010, the memory 3030 and the transceiver 3020 may be devices integrated on different chips. For example, the processor 3010 and the memory 3030 may be integrated in the baseband chip, and the transceiver 3020 may be integrated in the radio frequency chip. The processor 3010, the memory 3030 and the transceiver 3020 may also be devices integrated on the same chip. This application does not limit this.
可选地，该通信装置3000是配置在终端设备中的部件，如电路、芯片、芯片***等。Optionally, the communication apparatus 3000 is a component configured in a terminal device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and the like.
可选地，该通信装置3000是配置在网络设备中的部件，如电路、芯片、芯片***等。Optionally, the communication apparatus 3000 is a component configured in a network device, such as a circuit, a chip, a chip system, and the like.
其中，收发器3020也可以是通信接口，如输入/输出接口、电路等。该收发器3020与处理器3010和存储器3020都可以集成在同一个芯片中，如集成在基带芯片中。The transceiver 3020 may also be a communication interface, such as an input/output interface, a circuit, and the like. The transceiver 3020, the processor 3010 and the memory 3020 can be integrated in the same chip, such as integrated in a baseband chip.
图15是本申请实施例提供的终端设备4000的结构示意图。该终端设备4000可应用于如图1所示的***中，执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。如图所示，该终端设备4000包括处理器4010和收发器4020。可选地，该终端设备4000还包括存储器4030。其中，处理器4010、收发器4020和存储器4030之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制和/或数据信号，该存储器4030用于存储计算机程序，该处理器4010用于从该存储器4030中调用并运行该计算机程序，以控制该收发器4020收发信号。可选地，终端设备4000还可以包括天线4040，用于将收发器4020输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 4000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 4000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments. As shown in the figure, the terminal device 4000 includes a processor 4010 and a transceiver 4020 . Optionally, the terminal device 4000 further includes a memory 4030 . The processor 4010, the transceiver 4020 and the memory 4030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transmit control and/or data signals. The memory 4030 is used to store computer programs, and the processor 4010 is used to retrieve data from the memory 4030. The computer program is called and executed to control the transceiver 4020 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the terminal device 4000 may further include an antenna 4040 for sending the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 4020 through wireless signals.
上述处理器4010可以和存储器4030可以合成一个处理装置，处理器4010用于执行存储器4030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时，该存储器4030也可以集成在处理器4010中，或者独立于处理器4010。该处理器4010可以与图13中的处理单元2100或图14中的处理器3010对应。The above-mentioned processor 4010 and the memory 4030 can be combined into a processing device, and the processor 4010 is configured to execute the program codes stored in the memory 4030 to realize the above-mentioned functions. During specific implementation, the memory 4030 may also be integrated in the processor 4010 or independent of the processor 4010 . The processor 4010 may correspond to the processing unit 2100 in FIG. 13 or the processor 3010 in FIG. 14 .
上述收发器4020可以与图13中的收发单元2200或图14中的收发器3020对应。收发器4020可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中，接收器用于接收信号，发射器用于发射信号。The transceiver 4020 described above may correspond to the transceiver unit 2200 in FIG. 13 or the transceiver 3020 in FIG. 14 . The transceiver 4020 may include a receiver (or called receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or called transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used for receiving signals, and the transmitter is used for transmitting signals.
应理解，图15所示的终端设备4000能够实现图10至图12所示方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。终端设备4000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能，分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述，为避免重复，此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the terminal device 4000 shown in FIG. 15 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiments shown in FIGS. 10 to 12 . The operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 4000 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, reference may be made to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, and to avoid repetition, the detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
上述处理器4010可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作，而收发器4020可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述，此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned processor 4010 may be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that are implemented inside the terminal device, and the transceiver 4020 may be used to perform the operations described in the foregoing method embodiments that the terminal device sends to or receives from the network device. action. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
可选地，上述终端设备4000还可以包括电源4050，用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the above-mentioned terminal device 4000 may further include a power supply 4050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外，为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善，该终端设备4000还可以包括输入单元4060、显示单元4070、音频电路4080、摄像头4090和传感器4100等中的一个或多个，所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器4082、麦克风4084等。In addition, in order to make the functions of the terminal device more complete, the terminal device 4000 may further include one or more of an input unit 4060, a display unit 4070, an audio circuit 4080, a camera 4090, a sensor 4100, etc., the audio circuit Speakers 4082, microphones 4084, etc. may also be included.
图16是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图，例如可以为基站的结构示意图。该基站5000可应用于如图1所示的***中，执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。如 图所示，该基站5000可以包括一个或多个射频单元，如远端射频单元(remote radio unit，RRU)5100和一个或多个基带单元(BBU)(也可称为分布式单元(DU))5200。所述RRU 5100可以称为收发单元，可以与图13中的收发单元2200或图14中的收发器3020对应。可选地，该RRU 5100还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等，其可以包括至少一个天线5101和射频单元5102。可选地，RRU 5100可以包括接收单元和发送单元，接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)，发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述RRU 5100部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 5200部分主要用于进行基带处理，对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 5100与BBU 5200可以是物理上设置在一起，也可以物理上分离设置的，即分布式基站。FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may be, for example, a schematic structural diagram of a base station. The base station 5000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments. As shown, the base station 5000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 5100 and one or more baseband units (BBUs) (also referred to as distributed units (DUs). )) 5200. The RRU 5100 may be called a transceiver unit, which may correspond to the transceiver unit 2200 in FIG. 13 or the transceiver 3020 in FIG. 14 . Optionally, the RRU 5100 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 5101 and a radio frequency unit 5102. Optionally, the RRU 5100 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or called a receiver, a receiving circuit), and the sending unit may correspond to a transmitter (or called a transmitter, a sending circuit). The part of the RRU 5100 is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending indication information to terminal equipment. The part of the BBU 5200 is mainly used to perform baseband processing and control the base station. The RRU 5100 and the BBU 5200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU 5200为基站的控制中心，也可以称为处理单元，可以与图13中的处理单元2100或图14中的处理器3010对应，主要用于完成基带处理功能，如信道编码，复用，调制，扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理单元)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程，例如，生成上述指示信息等。The BBU 5200 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing unit, which can correspond to the processing unit 2100 in FIG. 13 or the processor 3010 in FIG. 14 , and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing , modulation, spread spectrum, etc. For example, the BBU (processing unit) may be used to control the base station to perform the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information and the like.
在一个示例中，所述BBU 5200可以由一个或多个单板构成，多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网)，也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网，5G网或其他网)。所述BBU 5200还包括存储器5201和处理器5202。所述存储器5201用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器5202用于控制基站进行必要的动作，例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器5201和处理器5202可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说，可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 5200 may be composed of one or more boards, and the multiple boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or may respectively support a wireless access network of different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network). The BBU 5200 also includes a memory 5201 and a processor 5202. The memory 5201 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 5202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation flow of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments. The memory 5201 and the processor 5202 may serve one or more single boards. That is to say, the memory and processor can be provided separately on each single board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits may also be provided on each single board.
应理解，图16所示的基站5000能够实现图12所示方法实施例中涉及网络设备的各个过程。基站5000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能，分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述，为避免重复，此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the base station 5000 shown in FIG. 16 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 12 . The operations and/or functions of each module in the base station 5000 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, reference may be made to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, and to avoid repetition, the detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
上述BBU 5200可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作，而RRU 5100可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述，此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned BBU 5200 can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that are implemented internally by the network device, while the RRU 5100 can be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
应理解，图16所示出的基站5000仅为网络设备的一种可能的形态，而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请所提供的方法可适用于其他形态的网络设备。例如，包括AAU，还可以包括CU和/或DU，或者包括BBU和自适应无线单元(adaptive radio unit，ARU)，或BBU；也可以为客户终端设备(customer premises equipment，CPE)，还可以为其它形态，本申请对于网络设备的具体形态不做限定。It should be understood that the base station 5000 shown in FIG. 16 is only a possible form of network equipment, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. The method provided in this application can be applied to other forms of network equipment. For example, it includes AAU, may also include CU and/or DU, or includes BBU and adaptive radio unit (ARU), or BBU; may also be customer terminal equipment (customer premises equipment, CPE), may also be For other forms, the present application does not limit the specific form of the network device.
其中，CU和/或DU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作，而AAU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述，此处不再赘述。Wherein, the CU and/or DU may be used to perform the actions implemented by the network device described in the foregoing method embodiments, and the AAU may be used to execute the network device described in the foregoing method embodiments to send or receive from the terminal device. Actions. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
本申请还提供了一种处理装置，包括至少一个处理器，所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述处理装置执行上述任一方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。The present application also provides a processing apparatus, including at least one processor, where the at least one processor is configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the processing apparatus executes the terminal device or network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments method performed.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置，包括处理器和通信接口。所述通信接口与所述处理器耦合。所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息。所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。所述处理器用于执行计算机程序，以使得所述处理装置执行上述任一方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。The embodiment of the present application also provides a processing apparatus, which includes a processor and a communication interface. The communication interface is coupled with the processor. The communication interface is used to input and/or output information. The information includes at least one of instructions and data. The processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the processing apparatus executes the method executed by the terminal device or the network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置，包括处理器和存储器。所述存储器用于存储计算机程序，所述处理器用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序，以使得所述处理装置执行上述任一方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。Embodiments of the present application further provide a processing apparatus, including a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the processing apparatus executes the method performed by the terminal device or the network device in any of the above method embodiments.
应理解，上述处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。例如，该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)，可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，还可以是***芯片(system on chip，SoC)，还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit，CPU)，还可以是网络处理器(network processor，NP)，还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor，DSP)，还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit，MCU)，还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device，PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the above-mentioned processing device may be one or more chips. For example, the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or a It is a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
在实现过程中，上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成，或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复，这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above-mentioned method can be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software. The steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here.
应注意，本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software. The aforementioned processors may be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application can be implemented or executed. A general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机 存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本文描述的***和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. The non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memory of the systems and methods described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行图10至图12所示实施例中的终端设备执行的方法或网络设备执行的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the steps shown in FIGS. 10 to 12 . The method performed by the terminal device or the method performed by the network device in the exemplary embodiment.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质存储有程序代码，当该程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行图10至图12所示实施例中的终端设备执行的方法或网络设备执行的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores program codes, and when the program codes are executed on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIGS. 10 to 10 . In the embodiment shown in 12, a method performed by a terminal device or a method performed by a network device.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种***，其包括一个或多个前述的终端设备和/或一个或多个前述的网络设备。According to the method provided by the embodiments of the present application, the present application further provides a system, which includes one or more of the aforementioned terminal devices and/or one or more of the aforementioned network devices.
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备完全对应，由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤，例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤，除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中，处理器可以为一个或多个。The network equipment in each of the above apparatus embodiments completely corresponds to the terminal equipment and the network equipment or terminal equipment in the method embodiments, and corresponding steps are performed by corresponding modules or units. For the sending step, other steps except sending and receiving may be performed by a processing unit (processor). For functions of specific units, reference may be made to corresponding method embodiments. The number of processors may be one or more.
上述实施例中，终端设备可以作为接收设备的一例，网络设备可以作为发送设备的一例。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如，发送设备和接收设备也可以均为终端设备等。本申请对于发送设备和接收设备的具体类型不作限定。In the above embodiments, the terminal device may be used as an example of a receiving device, and the network device may be used as an example of a sending device. However, this should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, the sending device and the receiving device may both be terminal devices or the like. This application does not limit the specific types of the sending device and the receiving device.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“***”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如，部件可以是但不限于，在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示，在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中，部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外，这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地***、分布式***和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据，例如通过信号与其它***交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system" and the like are used in this specification to refer to a computer-related entity, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, a component may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer. By way of illustration, both an application running on a computing device and the computing device may be components. One or more components may reside within a process and/or thread of execution, and a component may be localized on one computer and/or distributed between 2 or more computers. In addition, these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. A component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art can realize that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的***、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working process of the above-described systems, devices and units may refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的***、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个***，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所 显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited to this. should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (28)

  1. 一种选择网络的方法，其特征在于，包括：A method for selecting a network, comprising:
    终端设备根据第一判定结果确定候选网络类型包括非地面网络NTN和/或地面网络TN，其中，所述第一判定结果包括以下至少一种判定结果：The terminal device determines that the candidate network type includes a non-terrestrial network NTN and/or a terrestrial network TN according to the first determination result, where the first determination result includes at least one of the following determination results:
    所述终端设备是否处于第一模式、所述终端设备是否具备NTN接入能力、所述终端设备是否被允许接入所述NTN，所述候选网络类型用于所述终端设备选择服务网络，在所述第一模式下所述终端设备根据第一网络类型选择服务网络，所述第一网络类型包括以下至少一个：所述NTN、所述TN；Whether the terminal device is in the first mode, whether the terminal device has the NTN access capability, whether the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN, the candidate network type is used for the terminal device to select a service network, in In the first mode, the terminal device selects a service network according to a first network type, where the first network type includes at least one of the following: the NTN and the TN;
    所述终端设备根据所述候选网络类型选择服务网络进行驻留或接入。The terminal device selects a serving network for camping on or accessing according to the candidate network type.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一模式的开启或关闭由用户设置。The method according to claim 1, wherein turning on or off of the first mode is set by a user.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 2, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备展示用于开启或关闭所述第一模式的控件。The terminal device presents controls for turning the first mode on or off.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，所述第一模式的开启或关闭由网络设备指示。The terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, and the on or off of the first mode is instructed by the network device.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备在非接入层NAS生成第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备的接入层AS获取与所述候选网络类型对应的网络标识；generating, by the terminal device at the non-access stratum NAS, second indication information, where the second indication information is used to instruct the access stratum AS of the terminal device to obtain a network identifier corresponding to the candidate network type;
    所述终端设备在AS获取一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息，所述一个或多个第三指示信息与所述一个或多个网络标识对应，所述第三指示信息用于指示所对应的网络标识下部署了所述NTN和/或所述TN；The terminal device obtains one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information at the AS, where the one or more third indication information corresponds to the one or more network identifiers, and the third The indication information is used to indicate that the NTN and/or the TN is deployed under the corresponding network identifier;
    所述终端设备在NAS根据所述一个或多个网络标识和/或所述一个或多个第三指示信息确定服务网络标识，所述服务网络标识是所述一个或多个网络标识中的任意一个。The terminal device determines the service network identifier at the NAS according to the one or more network identifiers and/or the one or more third indication information, and the serving network identifier is any one of the one or more network identifiers. One.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备在NAS根据所述一个或多个网络标识和/或一个或多个第三指示信息确定服务网络标识，包括：The method according to claim 5, wherein the terminal device determines the service network identifier in the NAS according to the one or more network identifiers and/or one or more third indication information, comprising:
    所述终端设备在NAS根据第一指令将所述第一网络标识确定为所述服务网络标识，所述第一指令用于指示将所述第一网络标识确定为所述服务网络标识。The terminal device determines, at the NAS, the first network identifier as the serving network identifier according to a first instruction, where the first instruction is used to instruct to determine the first network identifier as the serving network identifier.
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备确定第一小区是否满足第一准则，所述第一准则为所述第一小区的至少一个网络标识与所述候选网络类型对应；determining, by the terminal device, whether the first cell satisfies a first criterion, where the first criterion is that at least one network identifier of the first cell corresponds to the candidate network type;
    在所述第一小区满足所述第一准则的情况下，所述终端设备驻留在所述第一小区。If the first cell satisfies the first criterion, the terminal device camps on the first cell.
  8. 一种通信的方法，其特征在于，包括：A method of communication, comprising:
    终端设备根据第一判定结果确定候选网络类型包括非地面网络NTN和/或地面网络TN，其中，所述第一判定结果包括以下至少一种判定结果：The terminal device determines that the candidate network type includes a non-terrestrial network NTN and/or a terrestrial network TN according to the first determination result, where the first determination result includes at least one of the following determination results:
    所述终端设备是否处于第一模式、所述终端设备是否具备NTN接入能力、所述终端设备是否被允许接入所述NTN，所述候选网络类型用于所述终端设备选择服务网络，在 所述第一模式下所述终端设备根据第一网络类型选择服务网络，所述第一网络类型包括以下至少一个：所述NTN、所述TN；Whether the terminal device is in the first mode, whether the terminal device has the NTN access capability, whether the terminal device is allowed to access the NTN, the candidate network type is used for the terminal device to select a service network, in In the first mode, the terminal device selects a service network according to a first network type, where the first network type includes at least one of the following: the NTN and the TN;
    所述终端设备向第一网络设备发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述候选网络类型，所述第四指示信息用于所述第一网络设备为所述终端设备选择目标小区。The terminal device sends fourth indication information to the first network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the candidate network type, and the fourth indication information is used for the first network device to select for the terminal device target cell.
  9. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收来自所述第一网络设备的配置信息，所述配置信息包括所述目标小区的信息，所述目标小区的网络类型与所述候选网络类型对应；The terminal device receives configuration information from the first network device, the configuration information includes information of the target cell, and the network type of the target cell corresponds to the candidate network type;
    所述终端设备切换到所述目标小区。The terminal equipment is handed over to the target cell.
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一模式的开启或关闭由用户设置。The method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein turning on or off of the first mode is set by a user.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method of claim 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备展示用于开启或关闭所述第一模式的控件。The terminal device presents controls for turning the first mode on or off.
  12. 根据权利要求8至11中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一模式的开启或关闭由网络设备指示。The method according to any one of claims 8 to 11, wherein turning on or off of the first mode is instructed by a network device.
  13. 一种通信的方法，其特征在于，包括：A method of communication, comprising:
    第一网络设备接收来自终端设备的第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备的候选网络类型，所述终端设备的候选网络类型是非地面网络NTN和/或地面网络TN；The first network device receives fourth indication information from the terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a candidate network type of the terminal device, and the candidate network type of the terminal device is a non-terrestrial network NTN and/or a terrestrial network TN ;
    所述第一网络设备根据所述第四指示信息决策是否进行切换或释放所述终端设备。The first network device decides whether to perform handover or release the terminal device according to the fourth indication information.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一网络设备根据所述第四指示信息决策是否进行切换或释放所述终端设备，包括：The method according to claim 13, wherein the first network device decides whether to perform handover or release the terminal device according to the fourth indication information, comprising:
    若第一小区的网络类型与所述候选网络类型不对应，则所述第一网络设备确定进行切换或释放所述终端设备。If the network type of the first cell does not correspond to the candidate network type, the first network device determines to perform handover or release the terminal device.
  15. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一网络设备在确定释放所述终端设备的情况下，向所述终端设备发送无线资源控制RRC释放消息，所述RRC释放消息中包括第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示第一小区的的网络类型。In the case of determining to release the terminal device, the first network device sends a radio resource control RRC release message to the terminal device, where the RRC release message includes fifth indication information, and the fifth indication information is used for Indicates the network type of the first cell.
  16. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method of claim 14, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一网络设备根据所述第四指示信息确定第二小区，所述第二小区的网络类型与所述候选网络类型对应；The first network device determines a second cell according to the fourth indication information, where the network type of the second cell corresponds to the candidate network type;
    所述第一网络设备向所述第二小区所属的第二网络设备发送切换请求消息；sending, by the first network device, a handover request message to a second network device to which the second cell belongs;
    所述第一网络设备接收来自所述第二网络设备的切换确认消息或切换拒绝消息。The first network device receives a handover confirmation message or a handover rejection message from the second network device.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述切换请求消息中包括所述第四指示信息。The method according to claim 16, wherein the handover request message includes the fourth indication information.
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述切换拒绝消息中包括第六指示信息，所述第六指示信息用于指示所述第二小区的网络类型，所述第二小区的网络类型是所述NTN或所述TN。The method according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the handover rejection message includes sixth indication information, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate a network type of the second cell, and the second cell The network type is the NTN or the TN.
  19. 一种通信的方法，其特征在于，包括：A method of communication, comprising:
    第二网络设备接收来自第一网络设备的切换请求消息，所述切换请求消息中包括第四 指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示终端设备的候选网络类型，所述终端设备的候选网络类型是非地面网络NTN和/或地面网络TN；The second network device receives a handover request message from the first network device, where the handover request message includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the candidate network type of the terminal device, the candidate network of the terminal device Type is non-terrestrial network NTN and/or terrestrial network TN;
    所述第二网络设备根据所述第四指示信息确定是否接受所述终端设备切换到第二小区。The second network device determines whether to accept the handover of the terminal device to the second cell according to the fourth indication information.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二网络设备根据所述第四指示信息确定是否接受所述终端设备切换到第二小区，包括：The method according to claim 19, wherein determining, by the second network device whether to accept the handover of the terminal device to the second cell according to the fourth indication information, comprises:
    若所述第二小区的网络类型与所述候选网络类型对应，则所述第二网络设备确定允许所述终端设备切换到所述第二小区；If the network type of the second cell corresponds to the candidate network type, the second network device determines to allow the terminal device to switch to the second cell;
    所述方法还包括：The method also includes:
    所述第二网络设备向所述第一网络设备发送切换确认消息，所述切换确认消息用于指示所述第二网络设备接受所述终端设备切换到所述第二小区。The second network device sends a handover confirmation message to the first network device, where the handover confirmation message is used to instruct the second network device to accept the handover of the terminal device to the second cell.
  21. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二网络设备根据所述第四指示信息确定是否接受所述终端设备接入第二小区，包括：The method according to claim 19, wherein the second network device determining whether to accept the terminal device to access the second cell according to the fourth indication information comprises:
    若所述第二小区的网络类型与所述候选网络类型不对应，则所述第二网络设备确定拒绝所述终端设备切换到所述第二小区；If the network type of the second cell does not correspond to the candidate network type, the second network device determines to reject the terminal device from switching to the second cell;
    所述方法还包括：The method also includes:
    所述第二网络设备向所述第一网络设备发送切换拒绝消息，所述切换拒绝消息用于指示所述第二网络设备拒绝所述终端设备切换到所述第二小区。The second network device sends a handover rejection message to the first network device, where the handover rejection message is used to instruct the second network device to reject the terminal device from handing over to the second cell.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述切换拒绝消息中包括第六指示信息，所述第六指示信息用于指示所述第二小区的网络类型，所述第二小区的网络类型是所述NTN或所述TN。The method according to claim 21, wherein the handover rejection message includes sixth indication information, wherein the sixth indication information is used to indicate the network type of the second cell, the network of the second cell Type is said NTN or said TN.
  23. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括用于实现如权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法的单元。A communication device, characterized by comprising a unit for implementing the method according to any one of claims 1 to 12.
  24. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括用于实现如权利要求13至22中任一项所述的方法的单元。A communication device, characterized by comprising a unit for implementing the method according to any one of claims 13 to 22.
  25. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, comprising:
    处理器，用于执行存储器中存储的计算机指令，以使得所述装置执行：如权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法。A processor for executing computer instructions stored in the memory to cause the apparatus to perform: the method of any one of claims 1 to 12.
  26. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, comprising:
    处理器，用于执行存储器中存储的计算机指令，以使得所述装置执行：如权利要求13至22中任一项所述的方法。A processor for executing computer instructions stored in the memory to cause the apparatus to perform: the method of any one of claims 13 to 22.
  27. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，其上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被执行时，以使得执行如权利要求1至22中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored thereon, and when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 22 is performed.
  28. 一种通信***，其特征在于，所述网络***包括如权利要求23或25所述的通信装置和如权利要求24或26所述的通信装置。A communication system, characterized in that, the network system comprises the communication device according to claim 23 or 25 and the communication device according to claim 24 or 26 .
PCT/CN2020/115508 2020-09-16 2020-09-16 Network and communication selection method, and communication apparatus WO2022056707A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/115508 WO2022056707A1 (en) 2020-09-16 2020-09-16 Network and communication selection method, and communication apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/115508 WO2022056707A1 (en) 2020-09-16 2020-09-16 Network and communication selection method, and communication apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022056707A1 true WO2022056707A1 (en) 2022-03-24

Family

ID=80777519

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/115508 WO2022056707A1 (en) 2020-09-16 2020-09-16 Network and communication selection method, and communication apparatus

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022056707A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20150133117A1 (en) * 2013-11-08 2015-05-14 Gogo Llc Systems and methods for two-part electronic device registration
CN110536341A (en) * 2019-04-29 2019-12-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Network information report method, device, user terminal, service node and medium
CN111565427A (en) * 2019-02-14 2020-08-21 华为技术有限公司 Network selection method, network equipment and terminal equipment

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20150133117A1 (en) * 2013-11-08 2015-05-14 Gogo Llc Systems and methods for two-part electronic device registration
CN111565427A (en) * 2019-02-14 2020-08-21 华为技术有限公司 Network selection method, network equipment and terminal equipment
CN110536341A (en) * 2019-04-29 2019-12-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Network information report method, device, user terminal, service node and medium

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ZTE CORPORATION, SANECHIPS: "Consideration on system information and cell (re)selection in NTN", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2006872, vol. RAN WG2, 7 August 2020 (2020-08-07), pages 1 - 6, XP051911756 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20220116844A1 (en) Method for selecting cell in ntn and apparatus
US10271314B2 (en) Apparatus, system and method of user-equipment (UE) centric traffic routing
US9025579B2 (en) Wireless connection management procedure
US9603083B2 (en) Method, device and system for selecting service cell
US20230069252A1 (en) Communication Method and Communication Apparatus
US20160373978A1 (en) Methods, radio base station and ue for handling cell reselection
US20240064600A1 (en) Handover processing method, terminal, and storage medium
JP6445720B2 (en) Detection techniques for high-gain mobile devices
US20230189188A1 (en) Method for terminal to access public and private networks and communications apparatus
JP2021029055A (en) Radio terminal and base station, and method therefor
US20140376393A1 (en) Apparatus and methods for dynamically reporting inter-system measurement capability in a wireless communication network
CN114745755B (en) Communication method, base station, terminal and storage medium
US20230035046A1 (en) Radio resource control rrc reestablishment method and apparatus
US20230199709A1 (en) Information processing method, terminal device, and network device
US20230138812A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
CN113475117A (en) Cell reselection method and unmanned aerial vehicle terminal
WO2014101198A1 (en) Cell reselection method and device
US20220015165A1 (en) Wireless communication device and method of connecting wireless communication
WO2022056707A1 (en) Network and communication selection method, and communication apparatus
WO2013034029A1 (en) Multi-mode user equipment access method, base station and multi-mode user equipment
WO2022001764A1 (en) Method and device for cell selection
WO2022160303A1 (en) Quality of service parameter processing method, terminal device, network function entity, and network device
JP2024518518A (en) METHOD AND UE FOR ACCESSING A SLICE-SPECIFIC RACH RESOURCE POOL - Patent application
WO2014012218A1 (en) Method, user equipment (ue) and network device for cell reselection
CN116017592A (en) Cell reselection method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20953567

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20953567

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1